COPYRIGHT NOTICE

This manual is a publication of Maple Systems, Inc., and is provided for use by its customers only. The contents of the
manual are copyrighted by Maple Systems, Inc.; reproduction in whole or in part, for use other than in support of Maple
Systems equipment, is prohibited without the specific written permission of Maple Systems.
The copyright of EasyBuilder-5000 and its related software belongs to Weintek Labs, Inc.

WARRANTY
Maple Systems warrants each product to be free from electrical and mechanical defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of two years from the date of shipment. This warranty does not apply to defects in the Products caused by abuse,
misuse, accident, casualty, alteration, negligence, repair not authorized by Maple Systems, use on current or voltages other
than specified by Maple Systems, or application or installation not in accordance with published instruction manuals. This
warranty is in lieu of any other warranty either expressed or implied.
Maple Systems’ liability is limited to the repair or replacement of the Product only, and not costs of installation, removal, or
damage to user’s property or other liabilities. If Maple Systems is unable to repair or replace a nonconforming Product, it
may offer a refund of the amount paid to Maple Systems for such Product in full satisfaction of its warranty obligation.
Maximum liability of Maple Systems is the cost of the Product.
Information furnished by Maple Systems, Inc., is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed
by Maple Systems for the use of this information nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which
may result from its use. No license is granted by implication, or otherwise, under any patent or patent rights of Maple
Systems, Inc. Maple Systems retains the right to revise or change its products and documentation at any time without notice.

IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED
Contact Watlow Customer Service at (507) 454-5300 for instructions on how to return a product and how to obtain a Return
Materials Authorization (RMA) number.
Package the unit in its original packaging container or, if unavailable, any suitable rigid container. If a substitute container is
used, surround the unit with shock absorbing material; damage in shipment is not covered by the warranty. Include a letter
with the unit describing the difficulty and designating a contact person.
All returns will be tested to verify customer claims of noncompliance with the product warranty. Improper return packaging,
which makes verification impossible, will void the warranty. Products passing the tests will be returned “AS IS” to the
customer.
If noncompliance is verified and is not due to customer abuse or the other exceptions described with product warranty, Maple
Systems will, at its option, repair or replace the Product returned to it, freight prepaid, which fail to comply with the
foregoing warranty, provided Maple Systems is notified of such noncompliance within the two-year warranty period.

APPLICATIONS ASSISTANCE
This manual is designed to provide the necessary information for trouble-free installation and operation of your new Operator
Interface Terminal (OIT). However, if you need assistance, please call Watlow at (507) 494-5656 between 7 a.m. and 5 p.m.
Central Standard Time (CST). Ask for an Applications Engineer. Or you may e-mail your questions to
[email protected].
 Table of Contents
EZware-5000 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Creating a Sample Project . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
OIT Models Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Setting the System Parameters . . . . . . 36
PLCs Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Creating a Popup Window . . . . . . . . . 40
About Your Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Creating a Startup Window . . . . . . . . 48
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Finishing Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chapter 5 - Simulator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
OIT Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Simulation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
What is a Silver Series OIT? . . . . . . . . 4
List of Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Chapter 6 - Using EZware-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 1 - Installation of OITs . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
The Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Unpacking the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Communications & Password Settings . 62
Managing Electrostatic Discharge . . . . 7
Editor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NEMA Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Simulation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . 7
Viewing Data Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Easy Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Control Panel Design Guidelines. . . . . . . . 8
Converting Data/Event Log. . . . . . . . . 70
Control Panel Grounding . . . . . . . . . . 9
Recipe Extended Mem. Editor . . . . . . . 71
Connect OIT Chassis Ground to Control
Pass Through Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
The EasyConverter Application . . . . . . . . . 76
Power Supply Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Managing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cable Routing and Noise Immunity. . . 11
Editing and Creating Screen Objects . . 82
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Basic Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . 86
Connect the OIT to Power . . . . . . . . . 12
Grouping Ojects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Panel Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Layering Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Mount the OIT to the Panel. . . . . . . . . 14
Nudging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuration Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Making Objects Same Size . . . . . . . . . 97
Connect the OIT to the PC for
Making Objects Same Color. . . . . . . . 98
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Chapter 2 - OIT Local Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Automatically Reboot OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Factory Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Save and Compile the Project . . . . . . . . . . 112
Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . 17 Chapter 7 - Creating Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Getting into Local Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Window Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . 18
Opening a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . 22
Creating a New Window . . . . . . . . . . 117
Transferring Projects and Data from
Assigning Underlay Windows . . . . . . . 121
USB/CompactFlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
How to Display Underlay Windows . . . 122
Chapter 3 - Connect the OIT to the PLC or Rules That Apply to Underlay
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
COM Ports for the Deleting a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
HMI5080/HMI5104/HMI5121 . . . . . . 26 Using Base Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
COM Ports for the HMI5056 . . . . . . . 27 How to Display Base Windows . . . . . . 123
Connecting to COM1 and COM3 on Using the Common Window. . . . . . . . . . . 129
Port A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Changing the Active Common
Connecting to COM1 and COM2 on Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Port B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Fast Selection Window. . . . . . . . 133
Connecting multiple PLC/controllers Using the Fast Selection Key . . . . . . . . 135
serially using daisy chaining . . . . . . . . 33 Changing screens using the Fast
Connecting one or more PLC/controllers Selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 System Message Window . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 4 - Creating Your First Project . . . . . . 35 Chapter 8 - Creating Graphic Objects . . . . . . . 140
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Connecting OIT to Computer . . . . . . . . . . 35 Using the Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . 140
Starting EZware-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Using Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ii Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Predefined Shapes and Pictures. . . . . . . . . 146 Monitoring Alarms with the Alarm/Event
Using a Predefined Shape . . . . . . 146 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Using a Predefined Picture . . . . . . 148 Displaying Alarms/Alarm Display Object . . 266
Graphics Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Bar
What are ‘states’? . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Using Shape Libraries . . . . . . . . . 150 Using Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Using Picture Libraries . . . . . . . . . 154 Monitoring Events With the Event Log
Using Group Libraries . . . . . . . . . 157 Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Using Sound Libraries . . . . . . . . . 160 Displaying Events Using the Event
Display Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Chapter 9 - Creating and Using Databases and
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Chapter 14 - Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 272
Creating and Using the Tag Library . . . . . 164 Using the Data Transfer Object. . . . . . . . . 271
Importing and Exporting the Tag Using the Recipe Transfer (Data Transfer, Trig-
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ger Based) Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using the Tag Library . . . . . . . . . . 165 Creating a Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Creating the Label Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Backup Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Setting Different Fonts for Different Lan- Chapter 15 - Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
guages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Using Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Importing and Exporting the Label
Macro Sample and
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Using the Label Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Variables, Declarations and Memory
Using Languages with the Label
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Memory Usage: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Chapter 10 - Representing Data with Graphics Variable Declarations. . . . . . . . . . 279
Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Variable Initialization . . . . . . . . . . 279
General Properties of Objects . . . . . . . . . . 172 Array initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Using Internal Data Memory of OIT . . . . . 184 Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Representing PLC Coil Registers . . . . . . . . 192 Order of Precedence . . . . . . . . . . 282
The Bit Lamp Object . . . . . . . . . . 192 Main Functions and Sub-
The Set Bit Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
The Toggle Switch Object . . . . . . . 197 Local and Global Variables . . . . . 282
Representing PLC Data Registers . . . . . . . . 199 Creating Variable Arrays . . . . . . . 283
The Word Lamp Object . . . . . . . . 199 Using Macros Within Recipes . . . . 283
The Set Word Object . . . . . . . . . . 202 Statements, Conditions &
The Slider Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
The MultiState Switch Object. . . . . 205 Function Calls and Passing Parameters
The Numeric Display Object . . . . . 209 246
The Numeric Input Object . . . . . . 211 Reading & Writing External Registers in
The ASCII Display Object . . . . . . . 216 a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
The ASCII Input Object. . . . . . . . . 217 Precautions, Tips & Tricks when Using
The Moving Shape Object . . . . . . 218 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
The Animation Object . . . . . . . . . 222 Compiler Errors & Error Codes . . . . . . . . . 288
The XY Plot Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Chapter 16 - Miscellaneous Objects. . . . . . . . . 291
Chapter 11 - Using and Creating Keypads . . . 240 Misc. Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
How to Create a Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Scheduler Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Displaying and Using a Keypad . . . . . . . . 241 Time Set Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Prohibit Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Chapter 12 - Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends . 246
Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Creating Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Creating Meter Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Creating Trend Displays & Data Sampling
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
History Data Display Part . . . . . . . 258
Chapter 13 - Capturing Alarms and Events . . . 264
Using Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

1010-1007, Rev 06
 iii
Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Introduction 1

Introduction - Welcome

Welcome to the Maple Systems’ Silver Series Operator Interface Terminals (OITs) from Watlow. Using graphic OITs has
never been easier. This powerful family of graphics operator interface terminals connect to Watlow controllers and other
devices such as programmable logic controllers (PLCs) to provide the human-machine interface in industrial applications.
The Silver Series has several features not found in other graphic OITs. This manual explains the operation of the Silver
Series OITs and how to implement the many available features using the EZware-5000 Configuration Software.
Watlow and Maple Systems have worked together to bring you this product. Please contact Watlow for support, and be sure
to utilize any resources referenced in this manual on the Watlow website (www.watlow.com) and the Maple Systems
Website (www.maplesystems.com).

EZware-5000 Support
OIT Models Supported
For the latest list of Silver Series Models supported by Watlow, please visit the Watlow website at www.watlow.com.

PLCs Supported
For the latest list of PLCs and controllers supported by the Silver Series OITs, please visit our website.

About Your Documentation

Maple Systems provides many resources to allow you to get the most out of your Silver Series OIT.
· Silver Series Operation Manual (shipped with EZware-5000 as a PDF file) - describes installation, general operation
and features of the Silver Series using EZware-5000 configuration software..
· Watlow Silver Operator Interface Terminal Manual Addendum - contains specific instructions and examples on
communicating with and creating interfaces for Watlow controllers.
· Controller Information Sheets - important information specific to each supported protocol.
· EZware-5000 On-line Help - covers the operation of EZware-5000. Always available by clicking HelpTopics from
the Help menu in EasyBuilder, or press F1 from any dialog.
For more information about these and other training sources, visit the Maple Systems website.

Conventions
When using EZware-5000, there are usually several ways to perform a task. For example, if you want to copy a graphics
object, you can:
· Click the Copy command on the Edit menu.
· Click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar.
· Press the CTRL + C keys on your computer.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
2 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

In most cases, we will describe each method when the task is first discussed. The menu method is then used whenever the
task is used in later procedures. Other conventions used in this manual are listed in the following table.

Convention Meaning
Characters that you must type exactly as they appear. For example, if you are directed to type a:\setup,
Bold
you should type all the bold characters exactly as they are printed.
Placeholders for information you must provide. For example, if you are directed to type filename, you
Italic should type the actual name for a file instead of the word shown in italic type. Italics are also used to
indicate a glossary term.
ALL CAPITALS Directory names, file names, key names, and acronyms
A plus sign (+) between key names means to press and hold down the first key while you press the second
KEY1+KEY2
key.
click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice.
Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once. Right-clicking
Right-click
usually opens shortcut menus.

The following table identifies symbols and margin icons.

Icon Meaning
4 Identifies a procedure.
4 Indicates a reference to additional information.
š Indicates an important note.

What You Need

The following items are needed to configure and operate your OIT.

Configuration Software EZware -5000

7431-0104 ( Ethernet Crossover cable for HMI5056T, HMI5080T, HMI5104T/XH, HMI5121T/X, HMI5150X
Configuration Cable1 models)
7431-0115 (USB download cable for HMI5043N, HMI 5056N, HMI5070NH/TH and HMI5100N/T models)
Personal Computer2 User Provided
Power Cable 6030-0009 2-conductor 18 AWG, shielded, no connectors
24VDC Power Supply User Provided
PLC User Provided
Maple Systems provides Controller Information Sheets which contain important information specific to each
Controller Information Sheet
PLC. Please locate the sheet that corresponds to your PLC on our website.
Communication Cable
Refer to our web site (www. maple-systems.com) for a list of available cables.
(HMI to PLC)

1Allows you to connect OIT directly to PC Ethernet port or to USB port to download/upload projects into the OIT.
2Computer requirements include a Pentium 1.7 GHz or higher processor, 512 MB RAM, 200 MB available Hard Disk
Space, SVGA or higher resolution monitor, Keyboard and Mouse, available Ethernet port or USB port (for downloading
project), at least one RS232 port for online simulation, Windows XP, 2000 or Vista.

OIT Basics
Operator Interface Terminals (OITs) provide much more versatility than traditional mechanical control panels. An OIT
allows a plant floor operator to monitor current conditions of a control system and, if necessary, to initiate a change in the
operation of the system. OITs connect to programmable logic controllers (PLCs) typically through the PLC’s serial
communications port. The OIT can be programmed to monitor and/or change current values stored in the data memory of the
PLC.
OITs can have either text-based or graphics-based displays. A text-based OIT can display printable text characters but no
graphics. Some text-based OITs can display text characters in various sizes. A graphics-based OIT can display printable text
characters of varying fonts and sizes and graphics shapes such as icons, bitmaps, or pictures. Using pictures instead of words
or characters often greatly simplifies the operation of the OIT, making the OIT much more intuitive to use.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Introduction 3

Some OITs use touchscreen displays while others use a membrane-style keypad. Membrane-style keyboards are best used in
applications in which the keypad is likely to become dirty. Touchscreen displays are placed over the OIT screen thus
providing much more flexibility than typical membrane-style keypads. Because of this, switches can be created on a
touchscreen that appear only when needed.
The Maple Systems Silver Series OITs are graphics-based touchscreen OITs. Before we get any further into the operation of
these OITs, it is necessary to define some terms that will be used throughout this manual.
Projects
The OIT has two basic segments of internal memory. The code memory contains the information required by the OIT that
controls how it operates such as the features supported and how it communicates to a PLC. The OIT programmer does not
have the ability to change code memory. The project memory pertains to all of the window screens created and any other
features that the OIT programmer can create using the EZware-5000 configuration software. Therefore, the term project is
used to designate the file that is sent to the OIT from the EZware-5000 software.
Objects
An object is any action that the OIT performs while it is communicating to the PLC. In order to get the operator interface
terminal to ‘do anything’, you must program the OIT with objects. Objects perform actions such as display text or graphics,
write a value to a PLC register, or display an alarm. Objects most often are graphics shapes that are to be displayed on the
OIT screen. For example, a Text Object is used to display text on the OIT. But objects are also used to configure the OIT to
perform some action. For example, a PLC Control Object tells the OIT to continuously monitor a PLC register that is used
by the PLC to request a new window. Some objects can display a graphics shape on the OIT screen and perform some
action. For example, a Toggle Switch Object creates a graphic object on the OIT that when pressed, activates a bit in the
PLC.
Graphics Object
A graphics object is any text, icon, or picture that can be displayed on the OIT. Graphics objects are further defined by how
they are composed or created. A Text Object is a graphics object that displays text on the OIT screen. A Bitmap Object is a
graphics object that displays a bitmap on the OIT screen. Bitmaps are files stored in the OIT to display pictures. A Shape
Object is a graphics object that displays a shape on the OIT screen. Shapes are also files stored in the OIT to display
pictures. Shapes differ from bitmaps in that shapes are stored using a vector-based file format whereas bitmaps use a
pixel-based file format. Each format has its advantages and disadvantages. We will not go into any more detail about bitmap
objects and shape objects until later in this manual. For now, think of them as objects used to display pictures on the OIT
screen. Finally, a Group Object is the most complex type of graphics object. It is a combination of other objects. Briefly, a
group object consists of one or more objects that are ‘grouped’ together and stored as one object. A good example is a
keypad, which is really a combination of several keys each designed to perform a specific task. When grouped together, a
keypad can be stored as a group object for use in other projects or windows.
Windows
A window is a screen that can be displayed on the OIT. Windows can be full-sized to completely cover the OIT display or
partially sized. Any partially sized window is usually referred to as a popup window. Windows can appear on the OIT
display by a request from the PLC or by a press from the touchscreen. Windows can be configured to any size. Once a
window is displayed, it can be moved around the OIT display, removed from the display, or minimized to an icon. Windows
can even overlap each other. Each window can display graphics objects and there is no limit to the number of graphics
objects that can be placed on each window. The Silver Series is capable of storing up to 1999 windows , but the actual limit
is determined by the total amount of memory used for the application. A more in-depth discussion of windows is covered in
later chapters. For now, think of windows as screens that can be displayed on the OIT.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
 4 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

What is a Silver Series OIT?

The Silver Series OITs by Maple Systems are graphics operator interfaces designed to connect to PLCs in an industrial
environment. The displays are covered with analog resistive touchscreens designed for harsh industrial environments. The
touchscreens use the latest in touchscreen technology enabling the OIT programmer to create switches that are very fine in
resolution. Unlike many other touchscreen OITs on the market, the Silver Series OITs are not limited to a fixed number of
cells in which switches can be created. The OIT programmer can create as many switches of varying sizes and shapes as he
wishes, limited only by the total amount of memory available for the project.
Three LED indicators are provided on the face of the Silver Series OITs to provide instant feedback to the OIT operator of
the current operating condition of the OIT.

LED Indicator Purpose

PWR LED (yellow) indicates if power is applied to the OIT
CPU LED (green) indicates if the OIT is operating correctly
COM LED (red) indicates communications activity on PLC port

The Silver Series OITs have three serial ports, which provide a connection to a PLC using RS-232 or
RS-485 communications and an Ethernet connection for PLC communication and project upload and download. The serial
ports also provide the ability to use the EZware-5000 configuration software in Simulation Mode enabling the OIT
programmer to test his project on the PC instead of downloading the project to the OIT.
The Silver Series is powered using +24VDC. Finally, a reset switch is provided on the back of the OIT to reinitialize the
OIT if an operational failure occurs. The Silver Series is designed for industrial environments and carries a NEMA 4X
(indoor only) rating as well as CE compliance for noise immunity and emissions.

List of Features
The next chapter will guide you through the creation of your first project. Before you proceed, you may wish to read this
brief list of some of the features offered in the Silver Series OIT.

Icon Name Description

Creates a graphics object to reflect the current status of a PLC bit.

Bit Lamp

Word Lamp Creates a graphics object to reflect the current state of a multi-state PLC data register.

Creates a touchscreen graphics object that represents a two-state switch. When pressed it
Set Bit sets/resets a PLC bit.

Creates a touchscreen graphics object that represents a multi-state switch. When pressed it can
Set Word
place a constant value in a PLC register or jog the value.

Creates a touchscreen graphics object that represents a two-state switch changing state
Toggle Switch
(picture) based upon a PLC bit. When pressed, it can control another PLC bit.

Slider Object Creates a touchscreen graphics object that changes the state according to the position of a
slider switch.

Multi-State Creates a multi-state touchscreen graphics object that changes state (picture) according to the
Switch value in a PLC data register. When pressed, it sends a value(s) to another PLC register.

Function Key Creates a touchscreen graphics object or runs a macro.

Displays a number stored in a PLC register. The number can be changed using a numeric
Numeric Input
keypad.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Introduction 5

Displays a number stored in a PLC register.

Numeric Data

Displays ASCII characters stored in a PLC register. Characters can be changed using an
ASCII Input
alphanumeric keypad.

ASCII Data Displays ASCII characters stored in a PLC register.

Creates a multi-state graphics object, which changes state (picture) and position on the screen
Moving Shapes
according to a value in a PLC register.

Creates a multi-state graphics object, which changes state (picture) on the screen according to a
Animation
value in a PLC register. The positions on the screen are predefined.

Configures the OIT to monitor PLC data registers to display for a specific window popup by a
Indirect Window
PLC word address

Direct Window Displays a Window based on a bit in a PLC register.

Alarm Displays Creates alarms to display alarms sent from the Alarm/Event Log Object.

Alarm Bar Displays alarms detected by the Alarm/Event Log Object on a single horizontal scrolling line.

Data Transfer Transfers data to the specified PLC registers based on a touch or PLC bit status.
(triggered)

Data Transferred Transfers data to the specified PLC registers on a timed basis.
(time-based)

Event Displays Displays messages detected in the Alarm/Event Log and can acknowledge the message(s).

Data Sampling
Stores data for trending and archiving.
(Data Logging)

Alarm/Event Log Contains the data for detecting alarm conditions.

Creates a trend graph. Samples data in a single or multiple 16-bit PLC register and plots the
Trend Displays
data on a time graph.

Bar Graph
Creates a bar graph with alarm monitoring.
Displays

Meter Displays Creates a scale meter.

Recipe Transfer Transfers data to the specified PLC registers.

System
Customizes the content of system-generated messages.
Message

PLC Control Configures the OIT to monitor PLC data registers to display full window screens.

History Data
Displays historical data in a tabular format.
Display

1010-1007W, Rev 06
6 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Backup Copies recipe, event or historical data to one of the USB memory devices.

Data Block
Displays the data in a series of registers as a line graph.
Display

XP Plot Creates an XY Plot.

Media Player Displays a video file.

Option List Creates a drop-down list blox

Scheduler Peforms an action based upon a time schedule.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Installation of OITs 7

Chapter 1 - Installation of OITs

Before You Begin

Please read the following for proper handling of your new OIT.

Unpacking the Unit

Carefully unpack the OIT. Please read any instructions or cautions that appear on the shipping container. Check all
material in the container against the enclosed packing list. Maple Systems, Inc. will not accept responsibility for
shortages against the packing list unless notified within 30 days. The equipment and its accessories were inspected
and tested by Maple Systems before shipment; all of the equipment should be in good working order. Examine the
equipment carefully; if any shipping damage is evident, notify the carrier immediately. You are responsible for
claim negotiations with the carrier. Save the shipping container and packing material in case the equipment needs to
be stored, returned to Maple Systems, or transported for any reason.

Managing Electrostatic Discharge

It is best NOT to remove the rear enclosure of the OIT. When the rear part of the enclosure is removed, the circuitry
inside is exposed to possible damage by electrostatic discharge during handling. Minimize the possibility of
electrostatic discharge by:
• Discharging personal static by grounding yourself prior to handling the OIT
• Handling the OIT at a static-free grounded workstation
• Connecting the frame ground (FG) connector of the OIT to a clean earth ground
• Placing the OIT in an anti-static bag during transport

CE Compliance
The Silver Series OITs have been tested to conform to European CE requirements per Council Directive
89/336/EEC. The European Union created these requirements to ensure conformity among products traded in those
countries. Specifically, the Silver Series OITs meet or exceed the noise emissions and immunity requirements as set
forth in the EN50081 (Emissions) and EN50082 (Immunity) standards. These products are designed to withstand
electrical noise in harsh industrial environments. They also conform to requirements that limit electrical emissions.
However, this does not guarantee that the products will be totally immune from possible malfunction in cases where
severe electrical noise occurs. Therefore, we strongly recommend that you follow the guidelines outlined in this
chapter for proper wire routing and grounding to insure the proper operation of the Silver Series OIT.

NEMA Rating
The Silver Series OITs are rated for NEMA 4X/12 (indoor only) or IP65 installations. This means that when the
OIT is properly mounted to a panel or other enclosure, the front enclosure of the OIT will provide protection to the
inside of the panel from splashing water, wind blown dust, rain, or hose-directed water. The OIT must be installed
according to the instructions in this chapter to be properly sealed.

Environmental Considerations
The Silver Series is designed to operate in temperatures from 0-45° C. It is intended for indoor installations and not
designed for outdoor applications. Avoid installing the Silver Series in environments with severe mechanical
vibration or shocks. Do not install the OIT in enclosures with rapid temperature variations or high humidity. Either
will cause condensation of water inside the device and eventual damage to the OIT.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
8 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Safety Precautions
Please observe the following precautions when installing the Silver Series OIT. Failure to comply with these
restrictions could result in loss of life, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.

Warning: Do not operate the OIT in areas subject to explosion due to flammable gases,
vapors, or dusts.

Warning: Do not connect the OIT to an AC power source. You will cause permanent damage
to the OIT.

Warning: Do not attempt to use a DC power supply that does not meet OIT power
requirements. You may cause malfunction or permanent damage to the OIT.

Warning: Do not power the OIT with a DC power supply used for inductive loads or for input
circuitry to the programmable logic controller. Severe voltage spikes caused by these devices may
damage the OIT.

Control Panel Design Guidelines

Pay careful attention to the placement of system components and associated cable routing. These items can
significantly enhance the performance and integrity of your control application.

Control panel is
Shielded power cable tied to a reliable
earth ground
Ground
strap

Silver Series
OIT OIT PLC/Host
(rear side) Power Power
COM1 [RS-485 2/4W]
COM3 [RS-485] COM1 [RS-232]
Supply line
filter
GND 24V COM3 [RS-232] COM2 [RS-232] PLC [RS-232]

OIT is
grounded to Line I / O control lines
control panel Filter
Ground wires
Shielded
communication Quiet ground
cable (isolated)
Quiet ground

Control Panel Example

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Installation of OITs 9

Control Panel Grounding

The control panel should be connected to a good, high-integrity earth ground both for safety considerations and
shielding purposes. Maple Systems cannot overemphasize the importance of good grounding. If you fail to use
good grounding procedures during installation, sporadic malfunction of the OIT may occur:
· Connect the OIT’s chassis ground terminal to a reliable earth ground with a low-resistance path.
· Route all earth ground wires that lead from the OIT, the PLC, the power supply, and the line filter to a
central earth ground point such as a barrier strip. This will ensure that no ground current from one device
influences the operation of the other devices.
· Connect the OIT chassis ground terminal to the control panel door using a heavy-gauge short braided cable
or ground wire to minimize resistance.
· Connect the power cable’s shield wire to the OIT’s chassis ground terminal.
· Connect the control panel to earth ground using a copper grounding rod close to the OIT and control panel.
Hinged doors on control panels do not provide a long-term electrical connection to the rest of the enclosure.
Corrosion develops over time and prevents good electrical contract. For this reason, a separate wire braid should be
installed from the hinged control panel to the rest of the enclosure.
For a more in-depth overview of ground wiring techniques, refer to technical note #1027, “OIT Ground Wiring and
Electrical Noise Reduction,” which you can find on our web site.

Connect OIT Chassis Ground to Control Panel

To reduce the possibility of electrical interference, connect the chassis ground terminal of the OIT to a clean earth
ground. If the control panel is metal, make sure it is properly grounded. Then connect a short heavy-gauge wire
(#18 AWG) from the chassis ground terminal of the OIT to a mounting bolt on the control panel door. The
mounting bolt must have good electrical contact to the control panel; scrape away any paint that may be covering
the panel to provide a good connection.
If the control panel is made of a non-conductive material, it is essential that you connect the chassis ground terminal
of the OIT to a clean earth ground point located close to the panel.
Control panel
(connected to earth ground)

Frame ground (marked FG)

Stud or screw

Area on panel free of paint

Typical Chassis Connection

1010-1007W, Rev 06
10 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Power Supply Selection

The power supply used to power the OIT should provide an output of +24 VDC 5% measured at the OIT power
terminal block. A 24VDC regulated power supply dedicated to the OIT is required. Consult the datasheet of your
particular OIT for current requirements.
The power cable for the OIT should be 18AWG, 2-conductor wire with a shield drain wire and protective shield
(foil or braid). The shield drain wire must be connected to earth ground at both ends of the cable. Please refer to the
“Connect the OIT to Power” section for more information.
A power line filter installed at the AC input to the OIT power supply is highly recommended as a safeguard against
conducted RF noise, which is often present on factory power lines. The wires connecting the output of the power
line filter to the power supply should be kept as short as possible to minimize any additional noise pickup. The case
of the power line filter should be connected to a quiet earth ground. The power line filter should have a current
rating of at least 3 Amps with common mode and differential mode attenuation.
Do not use the power supply used to provide power to the OIT to power switching relays, solenoids, or other active
devices.

Power Line Filter Connection

Cable Routing and Noise Immunity

Follow these guidelines when routing cable to the OIT:
· Always route the OIT communication cable and the power cable away from any AC voltage or rapidly
switching DC control lines.
· Never bundle the OIT cables together with 120VAC power wires or with relay wiring.
· Try to keep at least 8 inches (20 cm) of separation between the OIT cables and other power wiring. If
voltages greater than 120VAC are used in the system, greater separation is required.
· If the OIT cables must come near AC wiring, make sure they cross at 90 degrees.
· Run AC power wires in a separate grounded conduit to reduce electrical noise interference.
· Keep the cable lengths for the OIT as short as possible. Do not coil excess cable and place it next to AC
powered equipment.
· Cover any equipment used in the enclosure that operates at high frequency or high current levels with a
grounded metal shield.

Installation
It is necessary to follow all installation procedures described in this chapter for electrical noise immunity and CE
compliance.
Your Maple Systems OIT is designed to connect easily to your PLC. External rear connectors provide quick
connections for power, communications and programming wiring.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Installation of OITs 11

There are two connectors for serial communications on the rear of the OIT. Both of these are D-subminiature 9-pin
connectors.
Use the supplied separate 3-position terminal block to provide power to the OIT.

Connect the OIT to Power

The power cable for the OIT should be 18AWG, 2-conductor wire with a shield drain wire and protective shield
foil. You may buy cable P/N 6030-0009 by the foot from Maple Systems to make these.
Always run the DC ground wire directly back to the signal return of the power supply. Do not use the chassis
ground wire as your signal return.

Red wire (+)

Black wire (-)
Shield wire (bare) 24Vdc
power supply
Control OIT
panel (+) (-) (rear side)
24V GND FG
120Vac
Shield drain FG
Black
DC Output -V (Gnd)
Red
DC Output +V (+24V)

OIT Power Inputs

4To connect the OIT to power:
1. Connect the power cable to the OIT
a. Strip the power cable shield to expose 2” of the black and red wires.
b. Strip about ¼” of insulation from the black and red wires.
c. Thread the black and red wires through the ferrite core. The shield wire must be outside.
d. Connect the red wire to the DC positive (+) input of the OIT power terminal.
e. Connect the black wire to the DC negative (-) input of the OIT power terminal.
f. Connect the power cable shield wire to the OIT power terminal’s chassis ground input.
2. Route the power cable to the OIT power supply. The power cable should not be any longer
than necessary.
3. Install the power supply wires as follows (with colors shown for Maple Systems cable P/N
6030-0009):

Color Power Supply OIT

Red +Output/+24 Vdc +24V
Black -Output/+24 Vdc return GND
Shield Case ground FG

1010-1007W, Rev 06
12 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

š The power connector on the Silver Series is a terminal block with wire clamps. Lugs
are not required.

Typical Power Wiring

Panel Preparation
A metal panel or mounting surface with a minimum thickness of 15 gauge (0.059 inch/3.3mm) if cold-rolled steel or
hardened steel, or 10 gauge (0.101 inch/2.6mm) if aluminum alloy (6061-T6 preferred) is required. Thinner panels
or surfaces may bow between the mounting clamps and not form a seal with the gasket.
The area of the panel or mounting surface where the gasket comes into contact must be flat and free of scratches,
pits, and other features that prevent the gasket from sealing properly. If the panel or mounting surface is not
uniform, thick, flat, stiff, or smooth enough, then a sealant such as silicone may be required.

WARNING: The OIT requires a stiff, flat, smooth mounting surface free of blemishes
to seal properly to NEMA 4.

š Clean and deburr the panel cutout before the OIT is installed.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Installation of OITs 13

Mount the OIT to the Panel

Ends of screws must not Tighten all screw clamps until

protrude from the clamp they are uniformly snug
Panel Panel

Hold the OIT against

the panel until all screw
clamps are in position
Screw clamp locking
tabs go through the
slots
Screw Clamp Placement Clamps Tightened

Installing Screws on the OIT

Position 4 screw clamps

(2 each side)

Panel

Position screw clamps 6 places in slots provided:

2 screw clamps each side and one top and bottom

Panel

Side View

STEPS:
1. Prepare the screw clamps for the OIT by positioning the metal brackets at the midpoints of the screws.
Position the screws so that the ends don’t protrude from the plastic portions.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
14 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. Set the OIT in the panel cutout and hold it in place until all clamps are in position.
3. Tighten the screw clamps until all are uniformly snug.
CAUTION: Do not over-tighten the screws beyond snugness, or you may damage the housing, or cause the
touchscreen to malfunction.
REINSTALLATION: Because the gasket will take a “set” to the panel, be sure to reinstall the OIT to the same
panel cutout when a NEMA 4 seal is required. For best results, also replace the gasket itself.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
15 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Configuration Wiring
The OIT must be configured for a particular protocol before use. The EZware software is used for configuring the
OIT. For detailed instructions on installing and using the software, please refer to the software documentation
section of this manual.

Connect the OIT to the PC for Configuration

To configure the OIT using Maple System’s configuration software, you will need either an Ethernet crossover
cable, Maple P/N 7431-0104 or a USB download cable, Maple P/N 7431-0115 depending upon the OIT model used.
If using a switch or router between the PC and the OIT, use a straight-through or crossover cable as required by the
switch or router.
š If an Ethernet port is not available on the PC, you may be able to install a USB
Ethernet adapter. You can also transfer the project to the OIT with a Compact Flash or
USB memory device. Refer to Chapter 2, OIT Local Setup.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
16 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
OIT Local Setup 17

Chapter 2 - OIT Local Setup

Factory Configuration
Each OIT arrives from the factory with a demo project file that illustrates some of the most popular features of the
OIT. Please follow the directions enclosed in Chapter 4, Creating Your First Project, to configure your OIT for the
PLC that you are using.

The OIT also has a black reset push button and a four position DIP switch located through an access hole on the
back of the enclosure. The reset switch can be used to reinitialize the OIT if the OIT malfunctions. Only Dip
switch 1 has functionality. Dip switch 1 puts the OIT into Touch Calibration mode. For normal operation, all of
the DIP switches should be set to the OFF position.

This chapter describes how to use the Silver Series’ local setup options. The local setup allows touchscreen
calibration, transferring projects to and from the OIT, configuring the OIT’s IP settings, passwords, time and date,
screen contrast, as well as managing the storage of recipe and history files. Additionally, memory and other system
information can be viewed.

Calibrating the Touchscreen

The touchscreen of the OIT is fully calibrated before it leaves the factory so you shouldn’t need to adjust it.
However, with time the touchscreen may need to be recalibrated.

4To calibrate the touchscreen:

1. Turn Dip Switch 1 ON.
2. Cycle power to the OIT.
3. After the OIT displays a crosshair cursor, you are prompted to touch the cursor for:
a. Top left position
b. Top right position
c. Bottom right position
d. Bottom left position
e. Center position.
4. The OIT will then resume initializing.

Getting into Local Setup

Accessing the local setup menus requires a USB-mouse be connected to the OIT. Using the mouse, point to the
lower right-hand corner of the OIT. The open bar icon will appear.
Click on the icon to call up the setup toolbar: (note this tool bar is on HMI screen) Open/close bar
icon

System settings
icon
System info icon Virtual keyboard
icon

Small keyboard
icon

Large keyboard
icon

Please Note: the above tool bar is located on the HMI.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
18 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Changing the System Settings

4 To change the system settings on the OIT:
1. Open the Setup Toolbar as described above, and click the System Settings icon.
2. A dialog will be displayed requesting the Local password. The default password is 111111.

š You may have to move windows around a bit to gain access to the virtual keyboard.
You may also have to click inside the password field again.

3. Once the correct password has been entered, the System Settings dialog is displayed. For all
tabs, the Cancel, Apply, and OK buttons are available.

Cancel Close the System Settings dialog without saving any changes.
Apply Save the current settings without closing the System Settings dialog.
OK Save the current settings and close the System Settings dialog.

4. Click on the Network tab to configure network settings. The Network dialog is displayed.

5. The Network tab allows configuration of the IP settings. The default setting is Auto Get IP
Address. Use this setting if the OIT will provide an IP address by a DHCP server. If
connected to a DHCP server, this dialog will display the IP settings obtained by the OIT. The
IP fields are disabled, and are not editable.
6. If using a static IP address, use the IP Address Get From Below option. The IP fields are
enabled. Enter the appropriate settings for your network.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
OIT Local Setup 19

7. Click the Time/Date tab to configure time/date settings. The time/date dialog is displayed.

8. Configure appropriate time and date settings.

9. Click on the Security tab to display the security settings dialog. Here, you can select your
system passwords.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
20 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

10. Configure your password settings.

Local Password The password required to enter local setup.

Upload Password The password required to upload data from the OIT to a PC or memory module.
Download Password The password required to download data to the OIT from a PC or memory module.
Upload (History)
The password required to upload history from the OIT to a PC or memory module.
Password

11. The new password must be entered, and then entered again to confirm. As the password is
entered into the confirm field, an indicator will show if the two passwords match.

12. Click on the History tab to display the History dialog. This is where data stored in the OIT
can be cleared.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
OIT Local Setup 21

š This will not clear data stored on a Compact Flash or USB device.

Clear Recipe The OIT’s stored recipe data will be cleared when the Clear button is clicked.
Clear Eventlog The OIT’s stored event log data will be cleared when the Clear button is clicked.
Clear Datalog The OIT’s stored data log data will be cleared when the Clear button is clicked.

13. Click on the Backlight tab to display the Backlight dialog. The Backlight tab adjusts the
brightness of the OIT’s backlight. Use the mouse or touchscreen to roll the wheel. Rolling to
the left decreases the brightness, rolling to the right increases the brightness.

š System tags Backlight Up, Backlight Down, and Backlight Index can be used to adjust
the brightness at runtime.

14. Click on the CF Card tab to display the CF card dialog. The CF Card tab displays

1010-1007W, Rev 06
22 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

information about the Compact Flash module. If no CF card is present, the dialog will show
None. Otherwise, volume data about the CF card is displayed.

The Eject button will cause the OIT to ignore the CF device. It will not actually eject the card
from the OIT. If the Eject button is pressed, the CF card must be removed and re-inserted
before the OIT will recognize. Note that USB devices will not be displayed.

Viewing System Information

4 To view system information:
1. Open the Setup Toolbar as described above, and click the System Information icon. A dialog
will be displayed with two tabs.
2. Click on the Network tab to display the current IP settings.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
OIT Local Setup 23

3. Click on the Version tab to display the current firmware information.

Transferring Projects and Data from USB/CompactFlash

When a USB or Compact Flash device is inserted into the Silver Series OIT, a dialog is displayed. The same dialog
is displayed for transferring projects or data.

š Data is placed on the USB or CF device by EasyBuilder or Project Manager.

Download Project Transfer data from the USB/CF to the OIT

Upload Project Transfer data from the OIT to the USB/CF
Restart Project and exit Close the dialog and restart the OIT
Cancel Close the dialog without transferring
Restart after download/upload When checked, the OIT will restart after the transfer
The dialog will automatically close after 10 seconds if no selection is
Time Remaining
made; shows the time remaining

1010-1007W, Rev 06
24 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

When Download is selected, a dialog will appear requesting the Download password and what data to download.

Password Enter the Download password.

Download Project Files When checked, the OIT will check the specified folder for project data, and transfer it if it exists.
When checked, the OIT will check the specified folder for history data, and transfer it if it exists.
Download History Files
History data includes Recipe , Event Log, and Data Log data.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Connect the OIT to the PLC or Controller 25

Chapter 3 - Connect the OIT to the PLC or Controller

The Silver Series family of OITs can connect to one, two or more PLC/controllers. This is accomplished via two
9-pin D-sub serial communications connectors (Port A and Port B) and one Ethernet port. Each PLC/Controller has
its own wiring requirements. Maple Systems offers OIT-to-PLC/Controller communication cables that connect
directly to software controlled COM1, which is available on either Port A or Port B for most PLC/Controllers that
are built to any length and tested for high reliability. The Silver Series family has three software controlled
communications ports located on two physical connectors, designated as Port A and Port B (see Figures 1 & 2,
below).

Figure 1 - Com Ports - Rear View

Figure 2 - Com Ports - Bottom View

The three software controlled ports are COM1, COM2, and COM3. Each software controlled communications port
can only be selected for one communication type. Once a communication type is selected for one of these software
controlled ports, that port cannot be used for another communication type. Each of these communication ports has
between one and three communication types. COM1 can be RS232, RS485 4-Wire, or RS485 2-Wire. COM2 is
strictly RS232. COM3 is either RS232 or RS485 2-Wire. COM1 cables are readily available for purchase from
Maple Systems. COM2 and COM3 cables are custom-made according to wiring diagrams that can be found on
Maple Systems' web site. Connecting multiple PLCs and controllers may require a splitter.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
26 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

COM Ports for the HMI5080/HMI5100/HMI5104/HMI5121/HMI5150

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Connect the OIT to the PLC or Controller 27

COM Ports for the HMI5043/5056/5070

1010-1007W, Rev 06
28 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Connecting to COM1 and COM3 on Port A

Maple Systems Silver Series family of OITs is capable of connecting to multiple PLC/controllers. If you choose to
take advantage of this feature, and one of your PLC/controllers uses either RS485-4 Wire or RS485-2 Wire
communication, one of four splitters P/N 7431-0111, 7431-0112, 7431-0113, or 7431-0114 will be needed.
Scenario 1 – One RS232 PLC/Controller, COM1 configured for RS232
When using two RS485-2 Wire PLC/Controllers, with COM1 configured for RS485-2 Wire and COM3 configured
for RS485-2 Wire, splitter P/N 7431-0111 is needed.

Approx. 12.00”

1.00”
P/N Label COM1 RS485 Label

2.00”

DE9S Connector
& Backshell

DE9P Connector
& Backshell COM3 RS485 Label
4-40 x 1/2 Retainer Standoff, Hex Extender,
Screw, 2 places F/F,4-40X0.236,ZP

COM1
OIT 9P
1 1
9S RS485
WHT/BRN TX/RX- 1
TX/RX- 1 1 1
WHT/GRN
TX/RX+ 1 2 2 TX/RX+ 1
GND 5 BLU
5 GND
BLU
GRN
TX/RX- 3 6 COM3
TX/RX+ 3 9 BRN 1
9S RS485
9 TX/RX+ 3
6 TX/RX- 3
5 GND
NOTES:
1 Shield wire must be terminated to connector metal shell.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Connect the OIT to the PLC or Controller 29

Scenario 2
When using one RS485-4 Wire and one RS485-2 Wire PLC/Controller, with COM1 configured for RS485-4 Wire
and COM3 configured for RS485-2 Wire, splitter P/N 7431-0112 is needed.
Approx. 12.00”

1.00”
P/N Label COM1 RS485-4W Label

2.00”

DE9S Connector
& Backshell

DE9P Connector
& Backshell COM3 RS485 Label
4-40 x 1/2 Retainer Standoff, Hex Extender,
Screw, 2 places F/F,4-40X0.236,ZP

COM1
OIT 9P
1 1
9S RS485-4W
WHT/BRN RX- 1
RX- 1 1 1
BRN
RX+ 1 2 2 RX+ 1
TX- 1 3 WHT/GRN
3 TX- 1
TX+ 1 GRN
4 4 TX+ 1
GND 5 BLU 5 GND
BLU
WHT/ORN
TX/RX- 3 6 COM3
ORN
9S RS485
TX/RX+ 3 9 1

6 TX/RX- 3
9 TX/RX+ 3
5 GND
NOTES:
1 Shield wire must be terminated to connector metal shell.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
30 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Scenario 3
When using one RS485-4 Wire and one RS232 PLC/Controller, with COM1 configured for RS485-4 Wire and
COM3 configured for RS232, splitter P/N 7431-0113 is needed.
Approx. 12.00”

1.00”
P/N Label COM1 RS485-4W Label

2.00”

DE9S Connector
& Backshell

DE9P Connector
& Backshell COM3 RS232 Label
4-40 x 1/2 Retainer Standoff, Hex Extender,
Screw, 2 places F/F,4-40X0.236,ZP

COM1
OIT 9P
1 1
9S RS485-4W
WHT/BRN RX- 1
RX- 1 1 1
BRN
RX+ 1 2 2 RX+ 1
TX- 1 3 WHT/GRN
3 TX- 1
TX+ 1 GRN
4 4 TX+ 1
GND 5 BLU 5 GND
BLU
WHT/ORN
TXD 3 7 COM3
ORN
9S RS232
RXD 3 8 1

7 TXD 3
8 RXD 3
5 GND
NOTES:
1 Shield wire must be terminated to connector metal shell.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Connect the OIT to the PLC or Controller 31

Scenario 4
When using one RS485-2 Wire and one RS232 PLC/Controller, with COM1 configured for RS485-2 Wire and
COM3 configured for RS232, splitter P/N 7431-0114 is needed.

Approx. 12.00”

1.00”
P/N Label COM1 RS485 Label

2.00”

DE9S Connector
& Backshell

DE9P Connector
& Backshell COM3 RS232 Label
4-40 x 1/2 Retainer Standoff, Hex Extender,
Screw, 2 places F/F,4-40X0.236,ZP

COM1
OIT 9P
1 1
9S RS485
WHT/BRN TX/RX- 1
TX/RX- 1 1 1
WHT/GRN
TX/RX+ 1 2 2 TX/RX+ 1
GND 5 BLU
5 GND
BLU
GRN
TXD 3 7 COM3
RXD 3 8 BRN 1
9S RS232
8 RXD 3
7 TXD 3
5 GND
NOTES:
1 Shield wire must be terminated to connector metal shell.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
32 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Connecting to COM1 and COM2 on Port B

If both controllers use RS232 communication then only one splitter, P/N 7431-0110 is needed.

Approx. 12.00”

1.00”
P/N Label COM1 RS232 Label

2.00”

DE9P Connector
& Backshell

DE9S Connector
& Backshell COM2 RS232 Label
4-40 x 1/2 Retainer Standoff, Hex Extender,
Screw, 2 places F/F,4-40X0.236,ZP

COM1
OIT 9S
1 1
9P RS232
WHT/BRN RXD1
RXD1 2 2
WHT/GRN
TXD1 3 3 TXD1
GND 5 BLU
5 GND
BLU
GRN
TXD2 4 COM2
RXD2 6 BRN 1
9P RS232
6 RXD2
4 TXD2
5 GND
NOTES:
1 Shield wire must be terminated to connector metal shell.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Connect the OIT to the PLC or Controller 33

Connecting multiple PLC/controllers serially using daisy chaining

The RS485 4-wire and RS485 2-wire communications ports of the Silver Series family supports multi-drop
connections. A daisy-chain connection is made from the OIT to the first PLC/controller, and then from the first
PLC/controller to the second and so on (see below). The network may need biasing resistors – refer to the
PLC/controller documentation for more information.

Silver Plus Series OIT

RS-485

PLC PLC PLC PLC

š Refer to the Help Section of EasyBuilder-5000, under the How do I Section… for more
information.

Connecting one or more PLC/controllers via Ethernet

The Silver Series OITs have a single RJ45 Ethernet connector, configured for 10BaseT and 100BaseT operation.
This port is for both communicating with a PC for configuration purposes, as well as for communicating with
supported Ethernet PLCs and protocols.
The connector is wired just like the RJ45 Ethernet connector on a PC. The Ethernet connection to a PLC/controller
will vary with each PLC/controller. Some will require a straight-through connection, while others require a
crossover connection. See Maple Systems' website for cable drawings of Ethernet cables.

4To connect a single PLC/controller to an OIT:

1. Attach one end of the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 connector on the OIT
2. Attach the other end to the RJ45 connector on the PLC/controller
A router or switch is required to connect multiple PLCs/controllers to a single OIT. In general, standard
straight-through type cables can be used when connecting to a PLC/controller through a router or switch. Some
routers and switches may be auto-sensing. In this case, either type of cable may be used.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
34 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 35

Chapter 4 - Creating Your First Project

Often the best way to learn about new software is to jump right in. This chapter will step you through the process of
installing the EZware-5000 configuration software and then using the software to create a sample project that can be
downloaded to your OIT. We won’t go into much detail about how each feature works. The purpose of this
chapter is only to provide you with an overview of the process of creating a functional OIT that can communicate to
a PLC. For our sample project, we will configure the OIT using the local OIT Memory, but you may feel free to
select whichever protocol driver you intend to use.
By the end of this chapter, you should be able to:
• Install EZware-5000 configuration software.
• Create a sample project with two windows and several graphics objects.
• Save a project, compile a project and download the project to the OIT.
• Verify that the OIT is functioning properly.

Before You Begin

Before you install EZware-5000, make sure your computer meets the following minimum system requirements:
• Pentium-based 1.7 GHz or higher processor
• 512 MB of RAM (more memory improves performance)
• 200 MB available hard disk space
• VGA or higher-resolution monitor set for 16 Bit color 1024 x 768 pixel mode
• Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device
• One available Ethernet port
• Microsoft Windows XP, 2000 or Vista

Connecting OIT to Computer

Before you start your first project, the OIT should be connected to the computer so that the project can be
downloaded after creating it. You should also connect the PLC that you are using to the OIT so that you can test the
operation of the OIT after you have finished creating this sample project.

4To connect your OIT to the computer

1. Connect a +24VDC power supply to the OIT.
2. Connect a crossover Ethernet cable between the OIT and PC.
3. Apply power to the OIT.

Starting EZware-5000
Before you can create a sample project, you must start the configuration software. The EZware-5000 software has
two main applications:
• EasyBuilder – used to create the project downloaded to the OIT.
• Project Manager - used to place the OIT into different operating modes.
4To start the EZware-5000
1. From the Windows Task Bar, click the Start button, point to Programs, and then click the
Maple Systems-EZware-5000-Project Manager.
2. On the Project Manager dialog box, click EasyBuilder5000.
3. The Welcome to EasyBuilder dialog box appears. Select the correct OIT model.
4. Click OK to display the System Parameters screen of EasyBuilder.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
36 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The following illustration shows the various sections of EasyBuilder.

Manager toolbar

Part1toolbar

Work area

Part2 toolbar
Draw Toolbar

Creating a Sample Project

This section walks you through the creation of an EasyBuilder project named MTPrj1. Once downloaded to the
OIT, this basic configuration allows the OIT to connect to the PLC, display a startup screen, and display a screen
containing one PLC register monitor when a switch on the startup screen is pressed.
Although we strongly recommend that you perform the following steps to create this sample project, the project is
already included in your EasyBuilder software with the following filenames:
HMI5056.MTP-sample project for the HMI5056
HMI5070.MTP-sample project for the HMI5070
HMI5080.MTP-sample project for the HMI5080
HMI5104.MTP-sample project for the HMI5104
HMI5121.MTP-sample project for the HMI5121
HMI5150.MTP-sample project for the HMI5150

Setting the System Parameters

Whenever you begin a new project, you should always set the system parameters before you create any windows.
System parameters determine the basic operating conditions of the OIT such as what type of PLC it is connecting to.
4To edit the System Parameters
1. Click the Edit menu on the main screen of EasyBuilder.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 37

2. At the bottom of the menu, click System Parameters. The System Parameters dialog box
appears.

3. The dialog box has six tabs: Device, Model, General, Security, Font and Extend Memory.
Select the Device tab.
4. Click New… The Printer Server Dialog appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
38 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

5. Select your controller from the drop down menu next to PLC Type: Click Settings... The
Com Port Settings dialog appears.

6. Set Com Port Settings that match your PLC. Reserved settings are specific to each type of
PLC. Refer to the Controller Information Sheet for that PLC for more details. Click OK
twice to return to System Parameter Settings dialog

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 39

7. Now click on the General tab.

8. In the Option section, for the Startup Window no: drop-down, select 10. WINDOW_010
9. Click OK to return to the EasyBuilder main screen.
š For more information, consult your PLC operations manual or Maple Systems
Controller Information Sheets available on our website at www.maple-systems.com .

Creating a Popup Window

We will first configure Window #11 as a popup window. We will be using a function key in the startup window to
call this popup window; however, this window must first exist before we can map the function key to it, which is
why we are creating the popup prior to creating the startup window.
Multiple popup windows can be displayed on a full screen window. The windows may overlap each other or be
moved anywhere onscreen. This section will show how to create a scale and a numeric register that displays the
current value of the scale. You will also create an increment and decrement key to change the value in the scale
meter.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
40 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create Window#11

1. From the Window menu, click Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.

2. Click New… The Select Window Style dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 41

3. Click Base Window. The Window Setting dialog box appears:

4. Type WINDOW_011 in the Name: field and 11 in the Window no: field.
5. In the Size section, enter 210 for the width. Enter 150 for the height.
6. Click the pull down box from the Background Color box. The Color dialog box appears.
7. Click on the white color box, then click OK. The color box will reflect the color that you
have chosen.
8. In the Popup window section, enter 60 for the X position. Enter 60 for the Y position.
9. Click OK. The Open Window dialog will reappear.
10. In the Open Window dialog , highlight Window 11, then click on the Open button. Window
11 now appears on your work area, configured to the size indicated above.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
42 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create a meter display on Window#11

1. From the Objects menu, click Meter Display. The New Meter Display Object dialog box
appears.

2. Type Meter Display in the Description box.

3. Click the Outline tab to configure the meter style.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 43

4. In the Start Degree, type 270

5. In the End Degree box, type 90.
6. Uncheck "Full Circle".
7. Check Enable in the tick marks section.
8. Select black as the tick marks color.
9. Select main scale 6, sub. scale 1, length 6 for tick marks.
10. Select pointer arm style and length.
11. Click on the Limits tab.
12. Set value 0, Span 100.
13. Enable range limits and select low, mid and high colors. Width = 3.
14. Click OK.
15. Click the work area to place the meter.
16. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see a white square outline that is attached to your
cursor in the work area. This represents the meter display just created. Click to place the
meter display in Window #11.
17. Now, resize the meter so that it is a better fit on the popup window. Double click on the
meter display to re-display the attribute dialog.
18. Click the Profile tab to display the profile form.

19. Enter the following values:

X: 45
Y: 13
Width: 120
Width: 120
20. Click OK.
4To create a numeric register on Window#11
1. From the Objects menu, click Numeric/ASCII - Numeric Display. The New Numeric
Display dialog box appears.

2. Type Numeric Data in the Description box.

3. Click OK.
4. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see a white rectangle outline that is attached to
your cursor in the work area. This represents the numeric register just created. Click to place

1010-1007W, Rev 06
44 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

the numeric register on Window #11 somewhere underneath the scale meter. A numeric
register box will appear.

4To create an increment key on Window#11

1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Set Word. The New Set Word Object dialog box
appears.

2. Type Increment Button in the Description box.

3. Click on the pull down box of the Mode: box and select Press and hold increment (JOG++)
4. Enter 1 in the Inc. value box.
5. Enter 100 in the Upper limit box.
6. Click on the pull down box of JOG Delay and select 0.5 second.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 45

7. Click the Shape tab.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
46 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

8. Check Use shape, then click Shape library. The Shape Library dialog box appears.

9. Click Select Lib… The Open dialog box appears.

10. Select arrow1.plb from the list of shape libraries. Then click Open.
11. Click arrow1 in the Shape library box.
12. Scroll through the selections to selection 3. Click the shape, then click OK. The shape will
appear in the Shape tab.
13. Click OK.
14. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see a white square outline that is attached to your
cursor in the work area. This represents the increment key just created. Click to place the
increment key on Window #11.
15. Use the blue handles surrounding the key to drag the increment key to the desired size and
then place to the left of and below the numeric object.

4To create a decrement key on Window#11

1. We are going to create the decrement key by copying the increment key and then making
changes to the attributes.
2. Click the increment key to highlight it.
3. From the Edit menu, click Copy.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 47

4. From the Edit menu, click Paste. A copy of the increment key appears in the upper left
corner of the work area. Deselect the increment key by clicking on any blank space in the
work area.
5. Double-click on the second increment key. The Set Word Object’s Attribute dialog box
appears.

6. In the General tab section, change the Description to Decrement Button.

7. Click on the pull down box of the Mode Attribute: and select Press and hold decrement
(JOG—).
8. Enter 0 in the Attribute Bottom limit box.
9. Click the Shape tab.
10. Click Shape library. The Shape Library dialog box appears.
11. Scroll through the selections to selection 4. Click the shape, then click OK. The shape
should appear in the Shape tab.
12. Click OK.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
48 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

13. Drag the decrement button to the bottom right area of your window.

4To create a close window button

1. Finally, we must create a button that will close the popup window. From the Objects menu,
click Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box appears.
2. Type Close Window in the Description box.
3. Click the Close Window radio button.
4. Click the Shape tab to display the shape dialog.
5. Unclick the Use shape checkbox and click the Use picture checkbox. Click the Picture
library button. The Picture Library dialog box appears.
6. Click the Select Lib. Button on the bottom of this dialog box. Select the computer.flb
library, then click Open.
7. Under the Library: list box, you will now see computer. Click on computer to display this
library.
8. Scroll through the selections to selection 21. Click the picture, then click OK. The color box
will reflect what you have chosen.
9. Now click the Label tab and make sure Use Label checkbox is not checked. Click OK.
10. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see a white square outline that is attached to your
cursor in the work area. This represents the function key just created. Move this key to the
upper right corner of the screen and click to place.
11. Now double-click on this key to redisplay the attribute box. Click on the Profile tab.
12. Enter X:170 and Y:7 for position values. Enter Width: 33 and Height: 28 for the size
values.
13. Click OK.

Creating a Startup Window

We will now configure Window #10 as the startup screen. The OIT can store up to 1999 predefined windows but
screens 0-9 are reserved. Therefore, the first window screen that is available for configuration is Window #10. By
default, this is the startup screen when you begin a new project. This section will show how to place text in the
window and how to create two function keys that will open and close Window #11.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 49

To Display Window #10, from the Window menu, click 1 MTP1-Window10. Window 10 will now appear in your
workspace.
4To place text on Window#10
1. From the Draw menu, click Text. The New Text Object dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
50 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. Click the pull down box from the Color box. The Color palette appears.

3. Click on the white color box, then click OK. The color box will reflect the color that you
have chosen.
4. Select 16 in the size box.
5. Select Left in the Align box.
6. Double-click the word ‘text’ in the Content box and type “This is the Startup Screen.”
7. Click OK.
8. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see a white rectangle outline that is attached to
your cursor in the work area. This represents the text box just created. Center the rectangle
somewhere on the top third portion of the work area and then click. The text box “This is the
Startup Screen” will appear.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
 Creating Your First Project 51

4To create a function key on Window#10

1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box appears.

2. Type On Button in the Description box.

3. Click Display Popup Window.
4. Type 11 in the Window No. Box.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
52 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

5. Click the Shape tab to display the shape dialog..

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 53

6. Check the Use shape checkbox, and then click Shape library. The Shape Library dialog
box appears.

7. Click button1 in the Shape library box.

8. Scroll through the selections to selection 23. Click the shape, then click OK. The shape will
appear in the Shape tab.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
54 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

9. Click the Label tab. The label dialog appears.

10. Check the Use Label checkbox.

11. Click the pull down box from the Color box. The Color dialog box appears.
12. Click on the black color box, then click OK. The color box will reflect what you have
chosen.
13. Select 16 in the Size box.
14. Select Left in the Align box.
15. Type ON in the Content box..
16. Click OK.
17. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see a white square outline that is attached to your
cursor in the work area. This represents the function key just created. Center the square
somewhere on the bottom left portion of the work area and then click. The function key will
appear.
18. Double-click on the function key. The Function Key Object’s Properties box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 55

19. Click on the Profile tab.

20. Enter 47 for the X position. Enter 168 for the Y position.
21. Enter 62 for the Width. Enter 49 for the Height.
22. Click OK.
23. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see the function key that you just created move
and/or change size. This function key is used to display Window #11.
4To create a second function key on Window#10
1. We could create the second function key by repeating the steps for the first function key.
Instead, however, we will take advantage of the first function key and copy it.
2. Click the first function key to highlight it.
3. From the Edit menu, click Copy.
4. From the Edit menu, click Paste. A copy of the function key appears in the upper left corner
of the work area. Deselect the function key by clicking on any blank space in the work area.
5. Double-click on the second function key. The Function Key’s Object Attribute dialog box
appears.
6. In the General tab section, change the Description to Off Button.
7. Click on Close Window. Enter 10 for Window number
8. Click on the Label tab. Type OFF in the Content box.
9. Click on the Profile tab.
10. Enter 196 for the X position. Enter 168 for the Y position.
11. Click OK.
12. On the main screen of EasyBuilder, you will see the second function key that you just created
move to the lower right hand side of the work area. This function key is used to close
Window #11.
You have finished configuring your first window. It will look similar to the picture below:

You have now done your part in creating this sample project. It is now time for EZware -5000 to do its part.

Finishing Up
There are still a few steps, which must be completed before you can test your first project. In this section, you will:
• save the project onto your computer hard drive
• compile the project into a format that can be understood by the OIT
• download the project to the OIT
• verify that the OIT operates as expected
• exit the EZware-5000 software

1010-1007W, Rev 06
56 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

š If you haven’t already done so, now would be a good time to connect the OIT to the
computer and to connect the PLC that you are using to the OIT For more information,
consult the first part of this chapter or see “Installation of OITs” later on in this
manual.
4Saving your first project
1. From the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box appears.

2. Use the drop-down menus to locate the project folder.

3. In the File name text box, type MTPrj1.
4. Click Save. The file is saved onto your computer hard drive and the main screen of
EasyBuilder reappears.
4Compiling your first project
1. From the Tools menu, click Compile. The Compiling dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Your First Project 57

2. Click Compile. EasyBuilder will compile your project and display error results.
3. If no errors occur, click Close. The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears. If errors have
occurred, repeat the steps in the Creating a Sample Project section.
4Downloading your first project
It is necessary to determine the IP Address of the OIT. By default, the OIT is configured to get a dynamic IP
address from a DHCP server. This setting can be changed, To determine or change the OIT’s IP address:
1. Plug a USB mouse into the OIT.
2. Apply power to the OIT.
3. Move the mouse pointer to the lower right corner of the OIT screen. A menu bar will appear,
Click the wrench icon on the left side of the bar.
4. On the Network tab of the System Settings dialog, the OIT’s IP address will be shown. If set
for Auto Get IP Address, the OIT’s current IP setup information is displayed but is not
changeable. To change the IP address, select IP Address Get From Below and enter the data.
5. Once the IP Address has been established, the project can be downloaded. From
EasyBuilder’s Tools menu, select Download. Or, click the Download icon.
6. Enter the OIT’s IP address and Download password. The default download password is
111111. The default address is 192.168.0.201, Subnet 255....0, Gateway 192.168.0.254.
7. Make sure that the Firmware and Reboot HMI After Download boxes are checked.
8. Click the Download button. If the OIT is properly connected to the PC, the status box on the
download dialog will update with messages indicating the progress of the transfer. The OIT
itself will also display messages reflecting its status.
9. When the download is complete, the OIT will restart. Click the Exit button on the Download
dialog.

CONGRATULATIONS. You have completed your first EZware-5000 project.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
58 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Simulator Mode 59

Chapter 5 - Simulator Mode

As you saw from creating the sample project in the last chapter, downloading any changes you make to the OIT can
take time. To decrease the amount of time required to download a project to the OIT , uncheck the Firmware option
on EasyBuilder's download dialog.
A better way of testing changes made to a project is to use the computer to simulate the operation of the OIT.
This chapter shows you how to dramatically save time when creating and testing a project by putting the computer
into Simulation Mode. In Simulation Mode, the computer displays a screen that simulates what is seen when the
OIT executes the project file. You can use the mouse on your computer to simulate the operation of the touchscreen
on the OIT. Rather than waiting for the download to test each change you make to your project, you can now
instantly switch to Simulation Mode to see if your project is working as expected.
You can enter Simulation Mode in three ways. Using the sample project that you created in the last chapter, we will
guide you through the three methods.

The Simulation Screen

All modes of simulation use the same screen.

For our example, we are showing the sample project as it would appear after the ON function key has been pressed.
When the Simulation Mode screen first appears, it will always show the startup screen of the project. You can test
any objects you have created which require touchscreen input by clicking on them. In this example, clicking on the
increment key simulates the key as it is pressed on the touchscreen. Simulation Mode always uses the compiled
version of the project that you have created (the *.xob file). Therefore, you must save and compile any changes you
make to the project before you can simulate it.
Simulating the OIT is done in on-line or off-line mode.
On-line simulation is most useful when a project is near completion and you need to test the interaction of the
project with the PLC. It is also very convenient when making minor changes to a project because these changes can
be instantly checked for operation.
Off-line simulation does not require any connection to the OIT. Because of this, off-line simulation is most often
used when starting a project. You can quickly test new ideas and create preliminary screens without the OIT.
Off-line simulation is also great for demonstrating the operation of the OIT and becoming familiar with the
operation of the OIT before it is installed. If you want to simulate the interaction with a PLC when off-line, it can be
done by creating additional windows on the OIT which allow PLC data input.

4To use off-line simulation mode from EasyBuilder:

1. If the project has been modified since the last time it was saved and compiled, or if it has not
yet been compiled, it must be saved and compiled before the simulator can start.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
60 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. From the Tools menu, click Off-line Simulation or click the Off-line Simulation icon in the
Standard toolbar.
3. The Simulation Mode screen will appear.
4. To end off-line simulation, right click in the simulation screen and click Exit.

4To use on-line simulation mode from EasyBuilder

1. If the project has been modified since the last time it was saved and compiled, or if it has not
yet been compiled, it must be saved and compiled before the simulator can start.
2. From the Tools menu, click On-line Simulation or click the On-Line Simulation icon in the
Standard toolbar.
3. The Simulation Mode screen will appear.
4. To end on-line simulation, right click in the simulation screen and click Exit.
Simulation mode can also be started from Project Manager. Project Manager requires only the compiled project file
(*.xob). This can be useful in situations in which you want to demonstrate changes made to a project for a client
without giving him access to your project file. It also allows you to rapidly switch from simulating one project to
another without having to open, save, and compile each project.
4To use off-line simulation mode from Project Manager
1. Start the Project Manager software.
2. Click Offline-Simulator. The Open Project box appears.
3. Click on the compiled project file that you wish to simulate.
4. Click Open. The simulation screen will appear.
5. To end off-line simulation, right click in the simulation screen and click Exit.
4To use on-line simulation mode from Project Manager
1. Start the Project Manager software.
2. Click the Online-Simulator. The Open Project dialog box appears.
3. Click on the compiled project file that you wish to simulate.
4. Click Open. The simulation screen appears.
5. To end on-line simulation, right click in the simulation screen and click Exit.
Online simulation requires a direct connection between the PC and the controller. It is not necessary to have the
OIT connected.
The OIT’s COM1 RS232 connection is wired the same as a standard PC 9-pin serial connector. Therefore, the
standard Maple Systems’ COM1 RS232 cable for the selected PLC/controller can be used with online simulation.
Connect the cable end marked "HMI" to the PC’s serial port, and connect the other end to the PLC/controller.

š The above method will work with a standard PC serial COM port, regardless of the
COM number assigned to the PC serial port. EasyBuilder supports RS232
communication on ports COM1-COM9. COM3 and higher are intended for use with
online simulation, since the OIT itself supports RS232 communication on COM1 and
COM2 only.

š If simulating with RS422 or RS485 communication, the PC will require some

mechanism to support RS422/485. A communication card can be installed in the PC, a
USB communications module can be used, or an external RS232/RS485 converter can
be used. In any case, a standard Maple Systems cable may not work.
If simulating a project using Ethernet communications, an Ethernet cable between the PC and the PLC/controller is
needed. Consult the PLC/controller documentation for details.
Now that you are familiar with using simulation mode, the next chapter guides you through the fundamental
operation of three primary segments of the EZware-5000 configuration software.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 61

Chapter 6 - Using EZware-5000

Overview
The EZware-5000 software is composed of three separate applications which are accessible from the EZware-5000
folder: EasyBuilder, Project Manager, and EasyConverter. EasyBuilder is the application software used to create a
project file. Project Manager is a utility application that puts the OIT into different operating modes.
EasyConverter changes certain binary files created by the OIT into text files.
By the end of this chapter, you should be quite familiar with the operation of Project Manager and be able to
maneuver around EasyBuilder easily. This will pave the way for actually creating graphics objects in later chapters.
š EasyBuilder 5000 includes extensive online help. From any dialog box within the
software, click on the HELP button, or press the computer's F1 key.

The Project Manager

The Project Manager utility sets the communications parameters that are used by the computer when communicating
to the OIT. The utility can also be used to:
• Start EasyBuilder
• Write project data to a CompactFlash or USB device for transfer to an OIT
• Download project data to the OIT or upload project data from the OIT
• Start a project simulation session.
To access Project Manager, click on the Windows Start button and select All Programs-Maple
Systems-EZware-5000-Project Manager.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
62 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The following illustration shows the various commands available:

Communications & Password Settings

Settings Button

1. Download/ Upload passwords (default 111111)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 63

Reboot HMI
Connects to the OIT, checks password and resets the OIT in order to update system files.

Editor Settings
EasyBuilder-5000
Brings up EasyBuilder-5000 editing software for project creation and editing.
Build Download Data for CF/USB Disk

Data can be downloaded to the Silver Series OITs using both CompactFlash and USB jump drives. The Build
Download Data function builds the data to do this.
To build download data for CompactFlash or USB jump drive:
1. Insert CF card or USB jump drive to OIT.
2. Start Project Manager.
3. Click Build Download Data for CF/USB Disk… The Project Manager dialog appears.
4. Insert CF card or USB jump drive into PC. Note the folder that represents the USB/CF
device.
5. Click Browse... to select the folder that represents the USB/CF device.
6. Check the boxes that will be the sources for your data and browse to the appropriate file for
that source.
7. Click Build.

Easy Converter Application

The EasyConverter application is used to view data log files (*.dtl) and event log files (*.evt) that are created by the
OIT during operation. Data log files are files the OIT creates when capturing data using the Data Sampling object.
Event log files are history files the OIT creates when using the Event Log object. Both files are in binary format to
minimize the amount of file space required.
To view these files with a computer, you must use the EasyConverter application. In addition, EasyConverter can
take a data or event log file and convert it into a CSV (Comma Separated Value) file that can be easily imported into
other applications such as Microsoft Excel. For more information on how to do data logging, see Chapter 12 “Bar

1010-1007W, Rev 06
64 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Graphs, Meters, and Trends”, section “Creating Trend Displays & Data Sampling Objects”. For more information
on how to use Event Log files, see Chapter 13 “Capturing Alarms and Events”, section “Monitoring Alarms with the
Alarm/Event Log”.

To start the EasyConverter Application

1. From the Tools menu, click Data/Event Log Converter. Or click the Data/Event Log Converter icon in the
Project toolbar. You can also access the EasyConverter application from the Project Manager. The EasyConverter
application appears:

2. Click File…Open to display the Open dialog box. Search for the data log file (*.dtl) or event log file (*.evt) that
you wish to view, then click the Open button.

Please Note:
These files are captured by the OIT and stored in internal OIT memory, an attached SD card or USB flash drive.
You must copy these files into your computer before using the EasyConverter utility. If you are running a project
that is capturing data log or event log files using the Offline Simulator, the EZware-5000 application automatically
creates new folders on your computer and creates the files.
Data log files are stored in a folder using the name that you assigned in the Data Sampling Object attribute box
(ex:C:\MapleSystems\EZ5000\datalog\History Data1\20090618.dtl).
Event log files are stored in an eventlog folder (ex: C:\MapleSystems\EZ5000\eventlog\EL_20090625.evt).

Viewing an Event Log File (*.evt) using EasyConverter Application

1. From the EasyConverter application, click File…Open and locate the Event Log file (*.evt):

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 65

2. [Creation time]: the text line below the creation time heading shows the date and time that the file was initially
created. Format is Day of Week, Month, Day of Month, Time (24Hr format), and Year.
3. [Data fields]: the text line below this header is used to label and identify each column of data under the [Data]
header. The Data fields header shows the event number, category of event, time event occurred in 24HR format,
and the event (alarm) message recorded.
4. [Data]: this is where the actual data is recorded. Note that this is read only- the EasyConverter application does
not allow any edits.

Viewing a Data Log File (*.dtl) using EasyConverter Application

1. From the EasyConverter application, click File…Open and locate the Data Log file (*.dtl). As the file is loaded,
the following popup window appears:

2. Display Milliseconds: This option determines how the time value for each data record is displayed. In this
window you have four options:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
66 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

3. Decimal display and Scaling option: The dialog box below allows you to select different formats for the data
before it is displayed:

4. For this example, we have elected to use the linear scaling formula on Data 0 to convert the raw data (which is
measuring temperature in °F) to °C.
Also, the raw data collected for Data 4 is a floating point number calculated to three decimal places. However, we
are only concerned with a two decimal accuracy, so we change the ‘Digits’ field from 3 to 2. If we want to use
these same changes on other files, click the Save Setting… button to save the changes as a conversion (*.lgs) file.
When opening other data log files, we can apply the same changes by clicking on the Load Setting button and
selecting the proper conversion file.
Click OK to continue.
5. The data log file is shown:

In our example, notice that the value for Data 0 {200°F} has changed to 93°C and the value for Data 4 has two
decimal places {1697.85} instead of three {1697.850}.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 67

6. [Creation time]: the text line below the creation time heading shows the date and time that the file was initially
created. Format is Day of Week, Month, Day of Month, Time in 24Hr format and Year.
7. [Data]: the text line below this header is used to label and identify each column of data recorded. The header
shows the time each record was captured followed by the title given for each data column.
Please Note: this is read only-- the EasyConverter application does not allow any edits.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
68 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Converting a Data /Event Log File to a CSV file using EasyConverter Application

After opening a Data/Event Log file into EasyConverter, you can easily export the file into a CSV file. Note:
Microsoft Excel is required to convert the file.

1. Click File…Export to Excel or click on the Excel icon

2. Microsoft Excel is activated and you should see the data in a spreadsheet. Simply click File…Save As to save the
file.
3. Converting multiple files: EasyConverter also has a feature that allows you to select multiple Data/Event Log files
and save them to one CSV file. To do this click File…Multi-File or click on the Multi-File icon.

4. Click Add File…, then select which Data/Event Log files you wish to combine.

5. Enable Setting file: check this box to select a conversion (*.lgs) file that performs a linear scaling conversion or
decimal point conversion on the selected files.
6. Combine to a file: check this box to combine the files and put them into an Excel spreadsheet.

1010-1007W, Rev 02
 69

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 70

Easy Printer
The Easy Printer button allows monitoring of the print server through Project Manager. The EasyPrinter utility must
be running on the PC that is hosting the networked printer from which you wish the Silver Series OIT to print.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
71 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Recipe/Extended Memory Editor

The Recipe/Extended Memory Editor is an application that allows you to create, view, and modify recipe (*.rcp)
files and Extended Memory (*.emi) files. You can also use this editor to import/export recipe and extended memory
files to CSV formatted files which can then be shared by other applications.
To create a new Recipe/Extended Memory file:
From the Project Manager application, click Recipe/Extended Memory Editor:

1. Click File . . . New. The following dialog box appears:

2. Address range (unit:word) frame -- use this frame to select the total number of RW (recipe word) registers or
EMx (Extended Memory) registers that are used for the recipe or extended memory file. In the example above,
RW0 thru RW100 will be used.
3. Data format frame- use this area to enter how each data register element is be interpreted by the OIT. The data
collected and stored in recipe/extended memory files is in binary format and does not contain any information about
how each data should be interpreted by the OIT (for example, is the data in 16-bit signed integer format or BCD?).
Therefore, the data format is used to define how each data element is formatted (ie. Signed vs Unsigned, 16-bit vs
32-bit, Float, String, etc.).

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 72

a. Add: Click to add a new data register format. The following dialog box appears:

In the Data Type Dialog Box you can enter a description of the Data Type or Preset Value.You can also select
which format that the OIT will use to interpret the data.

Please Note: For String format, you must enter the total number of 16-bit register words used for the character
string.

b. Delete: If you wish to delete an item from the list, highlight a data element and click delete to remove from list.

c. Clear All: click to erase entire list of data elements.

d. Modify: highlight a data element and click Modify to revise the name of the data element or format.
e. Below is an example of a list of data elements created:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 73

4. Select your data format frame- use to select or create a data format template that can be used for other recipes or
extended memory files. In the example above, the data elements configured in the ‘Data format’ frame have been
saved to a template called ‘Recipe1’. Click OK.
5. A table of data elements appears that shows the recipe or extended memory table:

This table has several columns with headers:

a. ID: this is the ID number for each record.

b. Address: this is the starting RW address or EMx address for each record.

c. Data headers: these are the descriptions used for each data element created in the step above.

6. Edit the table by clicking on each data element field and entering the preset value. Please note that you are only
allowed to enter data according to the format defined for each data element.
Here is an example of a completed table:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
74 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

7. Click File...Save with the following options:

a. Save file as *.rcp for recipes.

b. Save file as *.emi for extended memory files. Note: You must use file names which correspond to the ten
extended memory areas preconfigured in the OIT (ex. em0.emi, em1.emi, …, em9.emi).

c Save file as *.csv to import file into applications such as Microsoft Excel.

8. Once the file is saved, you can copy the recipe file to your OIT by:
a. Procedure 1-- Downloading the file using the Project Manager:

i. With the computer connected to your OIT, click Transfer…Download.

ii. On the Download dialog box, check the RW enable box, then select the recipe file.

b. Procedure 2 -- Downloading using a SD card or USB Flash Drive:

i. Attach an SD card or USB Flash Drive to your computer.

ii. In Project Manager, click Build Download Data for CF/USB Disk button:

iii. Select the folder to save download data: Enter the SD card or USB Flash drive location.
iv. Check the Recipe (RW) enable box, then select the recipe file.

v. Click the Build button. A folder called ‘mt8000’ is created on the root directory of your drive.
vi. Remove the SD or USB drive and connect it to your OIT.
Please Note: if you are using more than one USB device, make sure that the USB Flash drive is connected first (this
identifies the USB Flash Drive as USB1).

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 75

Transfer Settings

Download
Sends a compiled project file stored on the computer to the OIT.

Upload
Receives a compiled project file from the OIT to be stored on the computer.
For more information about printing, see the Systems Configuration Settings/Printer tab section later in this chapter.

Simulation Settings

On-line Simulation
Opens a compiled project (*.xob) in on-line simulator mode.

Off-line Simulation
Opens a compiled project (*.xob) in off-line simulator mode.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
76 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Pass-through mode
The pass-through mode allows serial communications from the PC to the PLC, though the OIT. This can eliminate
the need to disconnect the PLC from the OIT when it is necessary to configure the OIT.

To use the pass-through mode:

1. HMI/IP: Specify the IP Address of the OIT that is to be used in passthrough mode or click
Get HMI Communication Parameters to read the current communication settings for the
OIT.
2. HMI work mode: Indicates the current mode of the OIT. After the communication
parameters have been received, the mode will be either Normal (OIT set to communicate with
PLC) or Passthrough (OIT is in pass-through mode).
3. Source COM Port: Set Com settings for the OIT that will be connected to the PC.
4. Destination COM Port: Set COM settings for the OIT that will be connected to the PLC.
5. Click Start Pass-through to begin passthrough and Stop Pass-through to end. Click Exit to
exit pass-through mode.
That’s all there is to Project Manager.

The EasyBuilder Application

This section guides you in how to operate the EasyBuilder application; however, it does not show you how to
program your OIT or how to create graphics objects. These topics are reserved for later chapters. This section
shows the fundamental operation of EasyBuilder from saving files, printing projects, and selecting the target PLC to
showing how graphics objects can be easily manipulated in the EasyBuilder work area. When you have completed
this chapter, you will be better able to use the features that are explained in later chapters.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 77

The following illustration is used for reference to the following sections:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
78 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Managing Projects
Like most Windows™ application software, EasyBuilder will open, save, close, and print files using the standard
windows format.
Opening, Editing Projects
To create a new project

1. On the File Menu, click New or click the New icon in the Standard toolbar. The EasyBuilder
dialog box appears.

2. Select the OIT model you intend to use with your project.

š A project’s display mode may be changed after the initial selection has been made. To
set Display Mode select Edit-System Parameters…, and select the Model tab. To
change the Display Mode, resize the window’s resolution to fit the mode selected.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 79

3. Click OK. The System Parameter Settings dialog appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
80 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4. This is where you will select your PLC or controller. Click New… to bring up the Device
Properties dialog.

5. Select the PLC option button and then select the PLC type from the drop down menu.
Configure any necessary COM ports and click Settings... to bring up the COM Port Settings
dialog.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 81

6. Configure the appropriate COM port settings for your PLC (for more information, see the
Controller Information Sheet for your PLC) and click OK.
7. Adjust Interval of Block pack settings, if necessary. This can be adjusted later by selecting
System Parameters-Settings.
8. Click OK. You are now ready to begin working in EZware-5000 to create your EasyBuilder
project.
4To open an existing project
1. On the File Menu, click Open or click the Open icon in the Standard toolbar. The Open
dialog box appears.
2. Click on the project file you intend to open.
3. Click Open. The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the initial screen of the project
displayed.
4To close a project
1. On the File Menu, click Close.
2. If changes have been made to the project file, EasyBuilder will ask you if you would like to
save the project. Then the main screen of EasyBuilder will remain but with no work area
displayed. You must now use the Open or New commands to edit a project.
4To save an existing project
1. On the File Menu, click Save or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar.
2. If the project already has a name, then the project will automatically be saved. If this is a new
project, then the Save As dialog box appears.
3. Enter a file name and then click Save.
4. The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears.
4 To save a project using the compress feature
The compress feature allows you to save a project in compressed format so that the project data takes less space on
your hard drive. This utility also will save the graphics libraries associated with the project into the project file.
This facilitates sending a copy of the project to another person who has EZware in order to download the project
into an OIT.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
82 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

1. From the Tools menu, select Compress/Uncompress.... The Compressing dialog box
appears.

2. In the Compress frame box under Source Name, select the project (*.mtp) file that you wish
to compress. File must have a .mtp extension.
3. Click Compress… to begin. The utility will compress the project file and all related graphics
libraries into a single file.
4To extract a compressed project file
1. From the Tools menu, select Compress/Uncompress.... The Compressing dialog box
appears.
2. In the Uncompress frame box under Source Name, select the project (*.cmp) file that you
wish to uncompress.
3. Click Uncompress… to begin. The utility will extract the project file and all graphics
libraries from the *.cmp file.
4To exit EasyBuilder
On the File Menu, click Exit -- or click on the standard windows Close icon in the upper right corner.

Editing and Creating Screen Objects

This section shows how to manipulate graphics objects that are placed onto the work area of EasyBuilder. We will
use examples from sample projects that are included with the EasyBuilder software: HMI5043.MTP,
HMI5057.MTP, HMI5070.MTP, HMI5080.MTP, HMI5100.MTP, HMI5104.MTP, HMI5121.MTP and
HMI5150.MTP. Please load one of these project files and have EasyBuilder ready before you begin this section.
We will refer to Window_12 of the project. To display Window_12 on EasyBuilder, perform the following steps.
4To open a window
1. On the Window Menu, click Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.
2. Click Window_12..

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 83

3. Click Open. Window_12 appears in the work area of EasyBuilder.

Display Options
Before we begin describing some of the commands that can be used to edit graphics objects, there are a few
commands that apply to the general work area of EasyBuilder.

EasyBuilder provides a Window Tree that can be used to easily maneuver between windows of a project. It also
allows you to select any object that is on the window that is currently displayed.

4To display/hide the Window Tree

1. On the View Menu, click Window Tree
4Using the Window Tree to display window screens
1. The Window Tree combines into a single tree a list of all of the windows in a project, and all
of the objects on each window. Using the 5056DEMO.MPT project, the following should be
seen :

2. Notice that the tree displays the title for each window next to the window number. This
makes it easy to determine windows have been created for a project. The asterisk (*) next to
Window #10 indicates that this window is currently open.
3. To display an open window, click on the window number in the Window Tree. To display a
window that is not yet open, double-click on the window number. This will automatically
open the window and display it.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
84 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4. To change any settings or close an open window, click on the window number to select it.
Then right-click anywhere inside the Window Treebar to display a pop-up dialog box. Select
Close to close the window or Setting to change any of the window settings.
5. Finally, to create a new window click on any window number that is not currently used.
Then, right-click inside the Window Tree and click New.
4Using the Window Tree to change object attributes
1. On the Window Tree, click + adjacent to any window number. The tree will expand to list
the objects on that window, as shown:

2. The Object ID of each objects will be listed. For example, TX_0 is Text Display #0, SW_0 is
Set Word #0, etc.
3. To highlight a particular object on the screen, click on the Object ID in the list. This allows
the quick selection of a particular object, especially on crowded screens or screens where
objects may be overlapping..
4. To display the object’s attribute dialog box, double-click the Object ID in the Window Tree.
4Using the grid function
One option is to have the work area covered with grid lines. These grid markings can be helpful when trying to
align objects that are created on the work area. If grid lines are selected, you can decide what size each grid is.
1. On the Option Menu, click Grid/Snap.
2. Click the Display box or click the Grid icon in the Standard toolbar.
š If you still don’t see the grid after you have enabled it, make sure that the color of the
grid doesn’t match the background color of the window currently displayed.
4Changing the grid size & color
1. On the Option Menu, click Grid/Snap
2. Select the X spacing and Y spacing for grid size.

š Spacing is measured in pixels.

3. Select the Grid color in the drop down menu.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 85

Another option is to display what are known as Object ID tags. Every time you create a new object in EasyBuilder,
an Object ID tag is assigned to the new object. This is done for several reasons:
• Object ID tags are required by EasyBuilder to differentiate each object created.
• If an error occurs during the compile process, EasyBuilder can refer to the window and object ID to
indicate the object that is causing problems.
4To enable/disable Object ID tags
1. On the Option Menu, click Function Property. The Function Property dialog box appears.

2. Click the Display Object ID checkbox to display tags.

3. Click OK.
If you enable the Grid on the work area, you may also take advantage of a useful feature called Snap. The Snap
option causes all objects placed into the work area to fall along the boundaries set by the grid lines. The Snap
option can help provide a more ordered appearance to graphics objects.
4To use the snap option
1. The Grid option must be enabled.
2. On the Option Menu, click Grid/Snap. The Grid/Snap Settings dialog box appears.

3. Click the Snap checkbox.

4. Click OK.
Finally, you will find that you can move objects by selecting them with the mouse cursor and dragging them to a
new location. However, you may find it difficult to select an object without accidentally moving it just a little. At
times this may be frustrating, so you may wish to disable the move feature using the mouse and only move an object
by changing it’s X and Y position parameters in the Profile tab of the object’s attributes box. This is the intent of
the Fix Objects feature.
4To enable the fix objects command
1. On the Option Menu, click Grid/Snap. The Grid/Snap Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click the Fix Objects checkbox.
3. Click OK. Movement by mouse cursor is now disabled.
4To zoom in on the selected window
1. Use the zoom pull-down menu at the top right of the screen. Zoom levels range from 50% to
200% in 25% increments.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
86 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To change the state of the selected window

1. Use the zoom pull-down menu at the top right of the screen.
2. The objects will appear as they would in the selected state.
Basic Editing Commands

4To select a graphics object

1. On the Edit Menu, click Select or click the mouse cursor icon in the Draw toolbar.
2. Click on the graphics object. For example, using Window_12, click on Fill Level. This
causes the text box to be selected, with small square blocks around the edges indicating the
boundaries of the object. Deselect the object by clicking somewhere else in the work area.

3. When a graphics object is selected, it can then be modified, copied, deleted, or moved to a
new location.
4To select multiple graphics objects
1. On the Edit Menu, click Select or click the mouse cursor icon in the Draw toolbar.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the graphics objects you
wish to highlight. For example, using Window_12, click to the left and above of Motor
Speed.
3. Move the mouse cursor to the lower right corner of the highlighted objects. Notice that a
rectangle is formed as you do this. In this example, move the mouse to the right and below
Fill Level.
4. Release the mouse button. The rectangle outline changes to small clear square blocks around
the perimeter of the objects selected. Now both objects are selected.

š If you do not completely enclose any graphics objects you wish to highlight, then they
will not be selected.

5. Alternatively, you may select objects by holding down the CTRL key while selecting each
object until all objects are selected.
6. When several graphics objects are selected, they can easily be moved, deleted or copied
together.

4To select next object

1. This option can be used to easily select an object that is underneath another object on the
screen. To use this option, you must first select the overlapping object.
2. On the Edit Menu, click Select Next Object or click on the Select Next Object icon on the
Standard toolbar. You can also right-click on the top-most object on the screen. This will
display a menu with a list of the overlapping objects on the bottom. Then check the object
that you wish to access.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 87

3. Once the object you are trying to access is selected, you can proceed to modify its attributes
or delete it.
4To select all objects
1. On the Edit Menu, click Select All Objects.
2. Small, clear, square blocks appear around the perimeter of all the objects on the window.
3. You can now easily move, delete or copy the entire window screen to a new window.

4Using the Undo and Redo commands

1. The Undo command is used to cancel the last command or action that you made. For
example, select the Motor Speed text box in Window_12.
2. Press the DELETE key on your keyboard to delete the text box.
3. From the Edit menu, click Undo or click the Undo icon from the Standard toolbar. You can
also press CTRL+Z. The deleted text box reappears.
4. The Redo command is used to cancel the Undo command. For example, if you decided that
you really did want the Motor Speed text box deleted, click the Redo command.

4Using the Cut , Copy , and Paste commands

1. These commands are all selected from the Edit menu or by clicking the appropriate icon in
the Standard toolbar.
2. Select the graphics object or objects you wish to cut or copy.
3. Click Cut to copy and remove the graphics object(s) from the work area or click Copy to
copy the graphics object(s). Using Window_12, select the Motor Speed text box and then
press CTRL+X to cut the object from the work area.
4. Objects cut or copied from one window can be pasted into other windows. Once the object
has been selected and cut or copied, open another window, then paste the object into that
window.
5. In this example, paste the Motor Speed text box back into Window_12 by pressing CTRL+V.
The pasted object appears highlighted in the upper leftmost corner of the work area.
6. Move the text box by clicking on the highlighted object and dragging it back to the original
position.
4Using the Multi-Copy command
The Multi-Copy command is used to make multiple copies of a single object on a screen. This is most useful when
creating new keyboards or data tables. In addition to copying the object, this command will automatically assign
new PLC memory addresses to each object, (applies only to Bit-type objects).

1. Select the object you wish to copy.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
88 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. From the Edit menu, select Multi. Copy.... The Multi. Copy dialog box appears.

3. Modify the settings according to your requirements.

4. Click OK. The main screen of EasyBuilder is redisplayed with the Multi. Copy command
executed.
Multiple objects can be created according to these parameters:
· Pitch vs. Interval: This setting affects how EasyBuilder places the copies of an object on the screen relative
to each other. The Pitch setting will interpret the X Distance setting as the distance from the left side of an
object to the left side of the next object and the Y Distance setting as the distance from the top of one object
to the top of another object.

The Interval setting will interpret the X Distance setting as the distance from the right side of one object to
the left side of the next object. The Y Distance setting is the distance from the bottom of one object to the
top of the next object.
· X Distance, Y Distance: These settings determine the spacing (in pixels) between objects.
· Quantity X, Quantity Y: These settings determine the number of copies to be made along the X axis
(horizontal) and the Y axis (vertical).
· Adjust Distance: This is the offset used when assigning a new PLC memory coil address to each new
copy. For example, if 1 is selected, then EasyBuilder will add one to the PLC memory coil address for each
new copy made.
4Using the Window Copy command
The Window Copy command is used to copy a window from an existing project into the project that you are
currently editing. This feature reduces time spent creating new projects since you can now use windows that you
created for other similar projects.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 89

1. From the Edit menu, select Window Copy.... The Window Copy dialog box appears.

2. In the Source Project: box, specify the path to the project that contains the window screen
you wish to copy. Use the Browse... command button if you are unsure of the location or
name of the project file.
3. In the Source Window box, enter the number of the window screen you wish to copy.
4. In the Destination Window box, enter the number of the window screen in the project you
are currently editing that you wish to copy the contents of the source window to.
5. Click OK. The main screen of EasyBuilder is redisplayed with the Window Copy command
executed.
4To delete a graphics object(s)
1. Select the object or objects you wish to delete.
2. Press the DELETE key or from the Edit menu, click Delete.
š You can restore the deleted object by using the Undo command.
4To move a graphics object(s)
1. Select the object or objects you wish to move.
2. When you place the mouse cursor over a highlighted object, the cursor changes to a crosshair.
This indicates that you are able to move the selected object. Move the object by clicking on it
and dragging the object to the proper position on the work area.
4To resize a graphics object
1. Select the object to be resized.
2. To resize the object, move the mouse cursor over one of the small black squares. The cursor
changes to a double-arrow icon to indicate that it is in resizing mode.
3. Click and drag the mouse to resize the object.
4. Objects can also be resized by changing the width and height attributes in the Profile tab of
the Attributes dialog box, (see below).
4To change attributes of a graphics object
1. Select the object to be changed, then select Change Attribute from the Edit menu. You can
also double-click the object.
2. The object’s attribute dialog box is displayed. Object Attributes defines what the object is or
how it behaves, (i.e. size, position, color, etc.). Click OK to accept any changes made or
Cancel to cancel any changes.
4To view object attributes of multiple graphics objects on a window
1. There will be times when you may want to quickly determine what PLC data registers are tied
to which objects in a window. This can easily be done using the object attributes command.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
90 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. For this example, open Window_11 to display the popup window of the sample project.

3. On the Edit menu, click Select all objects.

4. From the Edit menu, click Change Attribute. The Object Attribute dialog box is displayed.

5. All of the objects that use PLC data registers or the internal memory of the OIT are listed in
this dialog box according to their Object ID tag. Alongside each ID tag is the PLC or OIT
memory identifier.
Grouping Objects
When creating graphics on a window, you may create a complex graphic that is actually composed of several
simpler objects overlaid onto each other. This numeric display with increment and decrement button is an example
of grouped objects.

This numeric display is actually composed of three separate objects:

a numeric display an increment button a decrement button

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 91

These objects are then overlaid to represent the scale. Grouping the three objects together makes it easier to move
or copy the scale meter. Instead of copying each separate object, the scale meter can be assigned as a group, then
copied as though it were one object.
4To group objects
1. Select the objects to be grouped.
2. From the Edit menu, click Group or click the Group icon from the Manager toolbar.
3. All objects within the group can now be copied, deleted, or moved by clicking on the group.

4To ungroup objects

1. Select the objects to be ungrouped.
2. From the Edit menu, click UnGroup or click the UnGroup icon from the Manager toolbar.
3. All objects within the group can now be copied, deleted, or moved separately.

Layering Objects
Graphics objects can be overlaid upon each other. When ‘layered’ the graphics object on the topmost layer will be
completely seen. How much of the other graphics objects are seen depends on what is on top of them. The
following layer commands help to position the overlaid objects exactly how you want them. To better illustrate how
layering works we will use a rectangle object, a circle object and an arc object that are overlaid on each other in
Window_12 of the sample project.

4Using the top and bottom layer commands

1. Select one of the layered objects. In this example, select the layered rectangle from
Window_12.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
92 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. From the Edit menu, click Layer, then TopLayer or click the TopLayer icon from the
Manager toolbar. Note that the rectangle completely overlaps the circle and the arc.

3. From the Edit menu, click Layer, then BottomLayer or click the BottomLayer icon from
the Manager toolbar. Note that the rectangle recedes behind the circle and the arc.

4Using the next and previous layer commands

1. These two commands can move an object through the various layers of other objects.
2. Select one of the layered objects. Again, select the layered rectangle from Window_12.
3. From the Edit menu, click Layer, then PreviousLayer or click the PreviousLayer icon from
the Manager toolbar. Note that the rectangle covers the circle but not the arc.

4. From the Edit menu, click Layer, then NextLayer or click the NextLayer icon from the
Manager toolbar. Note that the rectangle recedes behind the circle and the arc.
Normally, an object that is controlled by a PLC Register (i.e., a Word Lamp, Bit Lamp, Animation, etc.) is brought
to the Top Layer when the value in the PLC Register changes. This behavior can be changed by the Object Layout

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 93

option on the General tab of the System Parameters dialog. A setting of Control sets the behavior as outlined above.
A setting of Nature (default setting) will result in the object remaining at the layer assigned during development.
š The Object Layout setting is global - affects all PLC-controlled objects in the application.

Nudging Objects
Nudging is used to fine-tune the movement of objects in the work area of EasyBuilder. Using the nudge feature on
a selected object will move that object in the specified direction either by one pixel or by the grid setting amount.

4Using the nudge top , bottom , left , and right commands

1. Select one of the layered objects or a group of objects in the work area of EasyBuilder.
2. From the Edit menu, click Nudge, then select the direction of the nudge or click the
appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar.
Aligning Objects
Alignment can be used to quickly align two or more objects. Aligning justifies objects to the desired position of the
last-selected object. The last select object will have "handles" of a different color than the other selected objects. To
better illustrate, refer to the left side of Window_12 of the sample project:

4Using the align left command

1. Select the objects you wish to align. For this example, select the three rectangle objects of
Window_12.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
94 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. From the Edit menu, click Align, then Left or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the objects back in their original position.

4Using the align right command

1. Select the objects you wish to align. For this example, select the three rectangle objects of
Window_12
2. From the Edit menu, click Align, then Right or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the objects back in their original position.

4Using the align top command

1. Select the objects you wish to align. For this example, select the three rectangle objects of
Window_12.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 95

2. From the Edit menu, click Align, then Top or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the objects back in their original position.

4Using the align bottom command

1. Select the objects you wish to align. For this example, select the three rectangle objects of
Window_12
2. From the Edit menu, click Align, then Bottom or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the objects back in their original position.

4Using the align horizontal center command

1. Select the objects you wish to align. For this example, select the three rectangle objects of
Window_12.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
96 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. From the Edit menu, click Align, then Horiz. Center or click the appropriate icon from the
Manager toolbar.

š Centering is based on the horizontal center of the left-most object.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the objects back in their original position.

4Using the align vertical center command

1. Select the objects you wish to align. For this example, select the three rectangle objects of
Window_12.
2. From the Edit menu, click Align, then Vert. Center or click the appropriate icon from the
Manager toolbar.

š Centering is based on the vertical center of the top-most object.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the objects back in their original position.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 97

Making Objects the Same Size

This feature is handy if you want to quickly make two or more objects the same size. Objects are sized to the size of
the last-selected object. The last-selected object will have "handles" of a different color than the other selected
objects. This is most often used when you are trying to overlap objects that must be the same size. To better
illustrate, refer to the left side of Window_12 of the sample project:
4The make same width command

1. Select the objects you wish to make the same width. For this example, select the left and
center rectangle objects of Window_12
2. From the Edit menu, click Make Same Size, then Width or click the appropriate icon from
the Manager toolbar.

4The make same height command

1. Select the objects you wish to make the same height. For this example, select the left and
center rectangle objects of Window_12
2. From the Edit menu, click Make Same Size, then Height or click the appropriate icon from
the Manager toolbar.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
98 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4The make same size command

1. Select the objects you wish to make the same size. For this example, select the left and center
rectangle objects of Window_12
2. From the Edit menu, click Make Same Size, then Both or click the appropriate icon from the
Manager toolbar.

Making Objects the Same Color

This feature can be used to make two or more drawn objects the same color.
4 To make objects the same color:
1. Select the objects that you wish to make the same color. EZware will choose the color of the
last selected object.

2. Select Edit-Make Same Color. The selected objects will all change color to the same color
as the last selected object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 99

Flipping Objects
These three commands allow you to quickly ‘flip’ or position an object in a new direction. To better illustrate, we
will again refer to Window_12 of the sample project.

4To flip vertically

1. Select the object you wish to flip vertically. For this example, select the left triangle object of
Window_12.
2. From the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the left triangle object back in its original position.

4To flip horizontally

1. Select the object you wish to flip horizontally. For this example, select the right triangle
object of Window_12.
2. From the Edit menu, click Flip Horizontal or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

3. From the Edit menu, click Undo to put the right triangle object back in its original position.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
100 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To rotate
1. Select the object you wish to rotate. For this example, select the right triangle object of
Window_12.
2. From the Edit menu, click Rotate 90 degrees or click the appropriate icon from the Manager
toolbar.

4 To Lock an Object
Each object position and size can be locked by using the Pin button. When the object is locked, its position and size
cannot be changed.
1. Select the object you wish to lock.
2. From the Edit menu, click Pinned or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar.
3. To unlock the object, deselect Pinned from the Edit menu or click the appropriate icon from
the Manager toolbar.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
101 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

General Settings
The final section of this chapter shows all the settings or parameters that can be configured using EasyBuilder.
From the Edit menu, click System Parameters. The System Parameter Setting dialog box appears. The dialog box
has seven tabs: Device, Model, General, Security, Font/Language, Extend Memory and Printer Server.
PLC Settings Configuration

1010-1007W, Rev 06
102 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To configure PLC settings

1. Click New… The Device Properties dialog appears.

š You can “export” a project created for one PLC brand to a different PLC brand by
loading the project file into EasyBuilder, then entering a different PLC type in this box.
EasyBuilder will go through your entire project and attempt to change each reference
to PLC data registers to a logical selection for the new PLC protocol; however, we
strongly recommend that you review these changes to assure that they are satisfactory.

2. Select the PLC button and then select your PLC from the drop-down menu.
3. There are two choices for Location - either Local or Remote. Select Local if the PLC will be
connected directly to the OIT. Select Remote if the PLC will be connected to a remote OIT.
If Remote is selected, then click Settings and configure the appropriate IP settings.

4. IP Address : Enter the address of the remote OIT.

5. Port No. enter the TCP/IP port assigned to the remote OIT during its configuration. Click
OK.
6. Select the appropriate PLC type from the drop down menu.
7. There are four selections for PLC I/F:
RS-232
RS-485 2W
RS-485 4W
Ethernet

1010-1007W, Rev 06
103 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

8 Select COM port and PLC station number (see Controller information Sheet for your PLC)
and then click Settings… The COM Port Setting dialog appears.

9. Select the appropriate COM port..

10. Select baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits. Use Maple Systems’ Controller Information
Sheets or the PLC manufacturer’s operations manual for information on the communications
parameters required by the PLC. These parameters have to match the PLC settings.
11. Click OK.
12. Interval of Block Pack (Words): Determines how many words are read from the PLC in
one communication cycle. For more information on this feature, see PLC Block Pack at the
end of this chapter.
13. Click OK.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
104 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Model Settings Configuration

1. HMI Model: Select your HMI Model.

2. HMI Station No: See Controller Information Sheet for more information.
3. Port No: Assign a TCP/IP port so that another OIT can access this port. For more
information, see the "Using Remote HMIs" section.
4. Clock Source: Select internal HMI RTC or External Device.
5. Printer Type: Select type of printer.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
105 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Auto Resizing Using the Model Tab

This tab can also be used to auto resize your project. The project and all objects and graphics will be automatically
proportionately resized.
4 To auto resize your project using the Model tab in the System Parameters dialog:
1. In the Model tab, select a different display size from the HMI model drop-down box and click OK.
2. If the new display is smaller than the existing display, the project will automatically resize. If the new
display size is larger then the existing display, the Resize Popup Windows/ Objects dialog appears.

3. Check Resize pop-up windows and Resize objects, and then click OK. The project will automatically
resize.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
106 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

General Settings Configuration

1. Fast select button attribute: Enables or disables the fast selection window (which is designated as window
number 3). Settings sets the look of the button including shape and color. Position sets the fast selection button on
either the lower left or lower right portion of the display.
2. Screen Saver:
Backlight Saver sets the number of minutes (none-255) of inactivity after which the backlight is turned off.
Note: Backlight is re-triggered when the screen is pressed or when an alarm occurs (if the "Enable back light
when alarm occurs" option is selected).
Screen Saver sets the number of minutes (none-255) that the screen goes untouched before activated.
Note: If the value "none" is selected, then the screen saver is disabled.
Saver Window No: designates the window that will be used as the screen saver.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
107 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

3. Option:
Startup Window No: Selects the window number that will be displayed every time the OIT is started up.
Extra No of events: The default number of events in the system is 1000.
Note: Users can add more records, up to 10,000 using this setting.
Common window: Determines if objects in the common window are placed above/below the base window.
Keyboard caret color: Sets the color of the cursor.
Object layout: Determines layout/disply of objects using Control Mode or Nature Mode. (see note below)
RW_A enabled: Enables an extra 64K of recipe data.
Please Note: Normally, an object that is controlled by a PLC Register (i.e., a Word Lamp, Bit Lamp, Animation,
etc.) is brought to the Top Layer when the value in the PLC Register changes. This behavior can be changed by the
Object Layout option on the General tab of the System Parameters dialog. A setting of Control sets the behavior as
outlined above. A setting of Nature (default setting) will result in the object remaining at the layer assigned during
development.
4. Keyboard: Lists the windows that have been configured as keyboards.
5. Add: Opens a window list from which you can select an additional window to be available as a project keyboard.
6. Delete: deletes the selected keyboard from the list.

Security

1010-1007W, Rev 06
108 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The Security tab determines the table of user passwords. Up to 12 sets of password can be set where one or all users
can be set or disabled. Each user can be individually enabled, and has a unique password and combination of any
six Access Classes, A-F. Only numbers are allowed for password.
When an object is created, it can be assigned an Access Class (A-F). When that object is activated (for example, a
button is touched), the OIT compares the access classes allowed for the current user to the access class specified for
the object. If the access class of the object is within the classes allowed, the object’s action is executed.
The access class for an object is configured in the User Restriction section of the Security tab for that object. So, for
example, if you wish to set the access class for a set bit object, click on the security tab of that objects properties
dialog, as shown below:

The object can be configured to handle insufficient security in one of two ways:
• The object can be hidden while security is not sufficient.
• The OIT can display the message defined as Message 1 in the System Message object.
There are a number of local OIT addresses that can be used with the security features.

Address Description Data Type Notes

LB9050 Reset security level to 0 (no security) Boolean Set momentarily to trigger.
Set by the OIT when an invalid password is
LB9060 Invalid password Boolean
entered. Must be explicitly reset.
Loads new passwords as defined by
LB9061 Load new passwords Boolean
LW9500-9523
Set to 1-12. Determines which password is
LW9219 User level 16-bit signed
used.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
109 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Enter password into this address to change

LW9220 Password 32-bit unsigned
the security level
Indicates the Access Classes currently
LW9222 Current access classes 16-bit signed allowed. Bit 0 indicates Class A; Bit 5
indicates Class F.
LW9500, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 1 32-bit unsigned
LW9501 set momentarily
LW9502, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 2 32-bit unsigned
LW9503 set momentarily
LW9504, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 3 32-bit unsigned
LW9505 set momentarily
LW9506, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 4 32-bit unsigned
LW9507 set momentarily
LW9508, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 5 32-bit unsigned
LW9509 set momentarily
LW9510, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 6 32-bit unsigned
LW9511 set momentarily
LW9512, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 7 32-bit unsigned
LW9513 set momentarily
LW9514, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 8 32-bit unsigned
LW9515 set momentarily
LW9516, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 9 32-bit unsigned
LW9517 set momentarily
LW9518, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 10 32-bit unsigned
LW9519 set momentarily
LW9520, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 11 32-bit unsigned
LW9521 set momentarily
LW9522, Loaded into security system when LB9061 is
New password, user 12 32-bit unsigned
LW9523 set momentarily

To log out, use a Set Bit to momentarily set bit LB9050.

Font

Determines the font for non-ASCII strings. To add a Windows TrueType font that is on your computer, click
Add... and select the font from the drop down menu that appears, and click OK.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 110

Extended Memory

Used to set parameters for saving data to CompactFlash and USB memory storage.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
111 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Printer Server

1. Check the Use Remote Printer Server checkbox to enable the OIT to print to a printer
connected to a PC on the network.
š The EasyPrinter utility (included with EasyBuilder5000) must be running on the PC
with the printer.

2. In the Output Settings section, select page layout (horizontal or vertical), print area size and
margins.
3. In the Communications Settings section, set the settings for the PC hosting the printer.
PLC Block Pack
This feature allows the OIT programmer to enhance the update rate of data received from the PLC when the PLC
registers displayed on a screen are ‘blocked’ close together. The default setting is 0. This means that the OIT sends
a command to the PLC requesting data for each register that is displayed on screen. For instance, if you have five
data fields configured on the OIT to monitor %R1, %R2, %R3, %R4, and %R5 of a GE PLC, then the OIT sends
five separate commands to the PLC to update these fields.
This is the slowest method of updating the registers, but it does have the advantage that the update rate does not
depend on having the PLC registers all together, (R1-R5). In other words, if monitoring %R1, %R10, %R65,
%R156, and %R2048, the update rate would be exactly the same as monitoring %R1-%R5.
The “PLC block pack” feature allows you to take advantage of any groups or ‘blocks’ of registers that allow the
OIT to send a smaller number of update commands to the PLC to get the information needed. The OIT will request
data for up to 32 contiguous PLC registers depending upon the PLC block pack setting and the addresses of the PLC

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 112

registers monitored on screen. The PLC block pack # represents the maximum number of ‘skips’ between registers
allowed before the OIT considers a PLC register to be part of a different block.
For example, suppose we wish to monitor the following 7 PLC registers on one screen: %R1, %R2, %R4, %R7,
%R12, %R14 and %R100.If PLC block pack is set to 0, the OIT sends seven separate commands to get the data. If
PLC block pack is set to 1, the OIT checks the spacing between requested registers. If the spacing is more than 1,
then a separate command is sent. In this example, the OIT sends four commands- one command to read R1, R2, and
R4; one command to read %R7, one command to read %R12 and %R14, and one command to read %R100.
With most PLC protocol drivers, more time is spent with ‘overhead’ data than getting the actual data that you need.
With the example above, setting the block pack number to 1 probably reduces the time required to update the PLC
data by as much as 40%! So properly setting the PLC block pack can have a major impact on the update rate of the
OIT.
If the PLC block pack setting were adjusted to 4 or greater, the OIT sends only two commands- one command to
read %R1, %R2, %R4, %R7, and %R12; and another command to get %R100. The update rate is now probably
three times as fast!
You might think that the best setting is 10 so why not have the PLC block pack always on 10? However, in some
situations, a setting of 10 may actually slow down the update rate. For example, if the PLC registers displayed on
the screen are actually %R1, %R10, and %R40 with the PLC block pack is set to 10, the OIT will send two
commands: one to get %R1 and %R10, another to get %R40. If the PLC block pack were set to 0, then the OIT
would have sent three commands. In this case, however, the three commands probably take less time than the two
commands because the OIT has to receive data for ten registers (%R1-%R10) in one command takes more time than
the overhead associated with two commands. Therefore, you should experiment with this setting if you find that the
update rate is longer than you would like.
Now that you know your way around EZware-5000 and its various applications, it is time to start creating your own
project. The next seven chapters show you in detail, all of the features that you can use to create a user-friendly
touchscreen graphics operator interface terminal. Along the way, we will attempt to provide you with clear
definitions of each feature and, if necessary, some additional examples of how each feature might be used.

Automatically Reboot OIT

EasyBuilder can automatically reboot the OIT after download.
4To enable automatic reboot of OIT after download
1. From the Tools menu, select Download. The Download dialog box is displayed.
2. Check the Reboot HMI after download checkbox.
3. Click OK.

Save and Compile the Project

EasyBuilder can automatically save and compile the project when downloading or simulating.
4To enable automatic save and compile
1. From the Option menu, select Function Property. The Function Property dialog box is
displayed.
2. Check the Automatic save and compile when download and simulate checkbox.
3. Click OK to exit the Function Property dialog box.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
113 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

EZWare-500 project translation utility

EZware-5000 has a translation utility that will convert projects created in EZware-500 {for HMI550T/TE,
HMI530T/TE, and HMI520T/TE models} into a project format that can be read and modified using the
EasyBuilder-5000 software. Below is a brief description of how to use this utility (for more information, download
technical notes on this subject from Maple Systems’ website):

To convert a *.eob (EZware-500 project) into a *.mtp (EZware-5000 project)

From the Tool menu, click Translate HMI500 Project:

1. Click the Browse… button for the HMI500 EOB file and select the EZware-500 project file you wish to convert.

2. By default, the converted file is automatically placed into the same directory. To modify the name of the file or
location, click the Browse… button for the HMI5000 project file.

3. Default font frame: All text objects in theEZware-500 project file use a proprietary fixed font. When converting
to an EZware-5000 project, these text objects are converted to TrueType fonts. Use this section to specify which
TrueType fonts you wish to use.

a. ASCII: This is the true-type font that is used on all text objects and labels.
b. Non-ASCII: International characters (such as ä) used in EZware-500 are converted using this selected font.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using EZware-5000 114

c. Font Size Table…: select a specific EZware-5000 font size that will be used for each EZware-500 font size.

4. Delete “Direct Window” objects which are triggered with LB9060~9069, 9080, 9081, (HMI5000-series use a
new mechanism to manage keyboards.): Check this box to delete any Direct Windows objects in the EZware-500
project file which are triggered by the internal memory bits listed above.

Please Note: In EZware-500, these internal memory bits allowed a popup window to display based upon touching
any Numeric Input or ASCII Input object located in a particular area of the screen. This feature is not available in
EZware-5000. By default, this option is checked.
5. Click the Translate button to begin conversion of the file. When done, you will see text in the comments field
that indicates if the conversion is successful:

6. Click the Exit button to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder-5000. Open the converted file as you would
normally open any EZware-5000 project file.

Please Note: due to some incompatibilities between the EZware-500 software and the EZware-5000 software, you
should check each screen and test operation after conversion to make sure that your OIT works to your satisfaction.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
115 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 02
Creating Windows 116

Chapter 7 - Creating Windows

This section shows how to create windows using EasyBuilder. To better illustrate some of the examples, please
open the sample project included with the EZware-5000 configuration software.

Window Fundamentals
An operator interface terminal wouldn’t be very useful if all of the information to be displayed could only be placed
onto one screen. Therefore, most OITs have multiple screens that you can use to display information. The Maple
Systems Silver Series is capable of storing up to 1999 windows (actual limit is determined by memory requirements
of each screen), giving you maximum flexibility in designing your operator interface. We prefer to call these
screens ‘windows’ because they have several features not normally associated with screens:
• Windows can be created in any size. You can make the window full-sized so that it fits the entire
area of the OIT display or you can create a window that partially covers the display.
• Windows can be overlaid on top of each other. All data on each window displayed is updated
continuously regardless of whether or not it is covered up by another window.
• Windows can be moved around OIT display to allow portions of other windows to come into view.
The Silver Series has four basic types of windows available for use: Base windows, a Common window, System
Message window, and a Fast Selection window. Base windows are the windows that you will most often use. The
common window and fast selection window are two windows reserved for special functions. System Message
windows are reserved for custom messages from the controller. By the end of this chapter, you should be able to
create these windows and use the many features available to them.

Opening a Window
To view the contents of a window in EasyBuilder, it must first be opened. When you create or open an existing
project file only the initial window is opened. To view any other windows that have already been created, you must
first open the window. This can be done using the Window Tree (see Chapter 3, “Using EZware-5000”, Display
Options) or by performing the following:
4To open a window
1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.

2. Click on the Window you wish to open. Then click Open. Note: you can also open the
window by double-clicking the window.
3. The Open Window dialog box closes and the opened window is displayed in the EasyBuilder
work area.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
117 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Let’s look at the Open Window dialog box again using the sample project.

The Open Window dialog box lists all of the windows currently created for the project. You will notice that in the
sample project, three windows have been created: 10, 11, and 12. The asterisk next to Window #10 indicates that
this window has already been opened. Each window is listed with the Window name and size. The window name
is the name that you assign to the window when it is created. The window size is shown for quick reference.
Finally, you will notice that the Open Window dialog box is also used to create a new window or change any of the
settings for a window. Press the Exit command button to return to the main EasyBuilder screen.
By default, when a window is opened it will replace any window that was displayed in the work area of
EasyBuilder. To switch between open windows, click the Window menu and select from the list of windows
currently open. You can also cascade (select Window-Cascade) or tile (select Window-Tile) the open windows to
see the windows at the same time.
EasyBuilder requires more resources from your computer every time you open another window. When many
windows are open, the performance of the computer may be affected. Therefore, you may wish to close some of the
windows until you need to edit them.
4To close a window
1. You will notice two small icons located in the upper right hand corner of each window: the
minimize icon , the maximize icon , and the close icon . To close
a window, click the close icon associated with that window .
These icons show in the window if minimized. Otherwise, the icons are located on the rightmost end of the menu
bar of EasyBuilder.

Creating a New Window

Whenever you create a new project, several windows have already been predesignated by EasyBuilder:
#3: Fast Selection - The window controlled by the Fast Sel button that allows you to quickly jump
to commonly accessed windows or objects.
#4: Common Window - A window that displays graphics (such as a company logo) or objects
that are always on every screen of the display. The common window runs below every other
window that is being displayed on the OIT.
#5: PLC Response - This is the window that is displayed when the OIT loses communications
with the PLC.
#6: HMI Connection - This is the window that is displayed with the OIT loses communications
with a remotely connected OIT.
#7: Password Restriction - This is a window that is displayed when a protected object or window
access is attempted without the proper password.
#10:Startup Screen - The window that displays whenever the OIT is started up.
#50:Keypad1 Integer - A style of numeric keypad.
#51:Keypad2 Integer - A style of numeric keypad.
#54:ASCII Middle - A style of an ASCII keypad.
#55:ASCII Small - A style of an ASCII keypad.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 118

#60:ASCII Upper M - A style of an ASCII keypad.

#61:ASCII Lower M - A style of an ASCII keypad.
#62:ASCII Upper S - A style of an ASCII keypad.
#63:ASCII Lower S - A style of an ASCII keypad.
The remaining windows are available to be created as you desire for your project. in order to create new windows,
the following steps must be performed:
4To create a new window
1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.

2. Click New… The Select Window Style dialog box appears.

3. Click Base Window. If the Fast Selection and Common Window buttons appear grayed out,

1010-1007W, Rev 06
119 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

then it is because those windows have already been created. The Window Setting dialog box
appears.

4. Modify the window parameters, then press OK. The Open Window dialog box reappears.
5. If you wish to open the window you just created, click on the window and click Open.
Otherwise, click Exit to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
Window Settings
Let’s look more closely at the parameters you can change when creating a new window.
š When a window is initially created, the window settings can be edited to make
changes; however, once a window has been created, the window number can not be
changed. To change the window settings, highlight the desired window and click on the
Setting... button.

Assigning a Window Name

The Name is a description box used to help you identify what the window is used for without having to actually
open the window and look at the contents. Up to 50 characters can be entered into this field with space characters
allowed.
Assigning the Window Number
Although 1999 windows are available on the Silver Series, two are specifically reserved for the Common Window
and the Fast Selection window and several are reserved for internal use. Therefore, you can assign #10-1999 to any
window you create. When you initially create a window, EasyBuilder will automatically assign the lowest available
number to the window. However, you can assign any number within the allowed range. In this manner, you can
group windows together that may share some common traits.
Assigning a Position
This is the starting position that the window goes to when it is initially called onto the OIT screen. The starting
position is labeled Start Pos: in the Window Setting Dialog box. The X and Y positions refer to the pixel location of
the OIT display at which the upper left hand corner of the window is to be displayed.
The default setting is X=0 and Y=0 which is the upper left hand corner of the OIT display. The X-axis refers to the
horizontal location and the Y-axis refers to the vertical location. The HMI5056 has a 320 x 240 pixel display, so
the ranges are X=0-319 and Y=0-239. The HMI5070 has a 480 x 234 pixel display, so the ranges are X=0-479 and
Y=0-233. The HMI5080/5104 has a 640 x 480 pixel display, so the ranges are X=0-639 and Y=0-479. The

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 120

HMI5121 has a 600 x 800 pixel display, so the ranges are X=0-599 and Y=0-799. The HMI5150 has a 1024 x 768
pixel display, so the ranges are X=0-1023 and Y=0-767.

Assigning Size of Window

You can vary the size of a new window to create full screen or popup windows. Popup windows are most often
used to display data that does not need to be on the OIT display all of the time. For example, you might want to
configure a numeric keypad in one popup window that can be moved aside or closed when not needed. The keypad
can be triggered to pop up when needed or appear with a keypress. The allowable range for the width is 100-320
(640 for the HMI5080/5104/5121) pixels. The allowable range for the height is 100-240 (234 for the
HMI5056/5070, 480 for the HMI5080/5104/5121) pixels.
Monopoly Feature
The monopoly feature is used to ‘monopolize’ all touchscreen action that can occur on the OIT screen. For
instance, suppose the OIT display is currently showing a full screen window with several touchscreen objects.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
121 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

If a popup window is displayed which does not have the monopoly feature enabled, the OIT operator is able to press
any function keys on the popup window or the full screen window since objects on both screens are active.

In this example, the OIT operator is able to press Key1-3 on the full screen window or the switch on Popup
Window#21. If another popup window is displayed that does have the monopoly feature enabled, then Key1-3 on
the full screen window will not respond when pressed.

Please note that the monopoly feature only disables touchscreen objects on the full screen window. The switch on
Popup Window#21 can still be activated, as can any popup window displayed on the full screen.
The monopoly feature can be used to display a popup window with some action that the OIT operator must perform
before being allowed to do some other action on the OIT. For example, you might construct a dialog box that asks
the OIT operator if some step in the control process has been performed. The dialog box would have Yes and No
function key options which, with the monopoly feature enabled, the OIT operator must press before continuing.

Assigning Underlay Windows

An Underlay Window is a Base Window that is displayed at the same time as the Base Window that calls it. Each
full-size Base Window can display up to three Underlay Windows. A Pop-Up Window cannot display any
Underlay Windows. There may be times when it is desirable to place the same information on multiple (but not all)
windows. Underlay Windows provide a means to accomplish that without the overhead of a Direct or Indirect
Window, and without using the Common Window (which makes the information visible on all windows). Underlay
windows also eliminate the need to actually place the same objects on multiple windows, which increases the
memory required for the project. Each Base Window can display up to three Underlay Windows, which are called
Bottom, Middle, and Top.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 122

EasyBuilder allows you to assign up to three underlay windows to any base window that you are creating. First,
create the underlay window; then select it from the pull-down list box when you change the settings of the base
window.

How to Display Underlay Windows

When you have common objects to display on multiple screens, use the Underlay Window feature to store these on
underlay windows attached to a base window. This decreases the amount of memory required for the project. The
base window “calls” the underlay window. Each full-size base window can display up to three underlay windows,
which are called Underlay #1, Underlay #2, and Underlay #3. Objects on the underlay windows cannot be edited
from the base window on which they are displayed.
A pop-up window cannot display any underlay windows.
To assign underlay windows to a base window, you must first create the underlay windows. Underlay windows are
created the same way base windows are created. Then you can assign the underlay windows to the base window.
4To assign underlay windows to a base window
1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.
2. Highlight the base window you wish to use.
3. Click the Setting command button. The Window Setting dialog box appears.
4. Click the pull-down list box for each Underlay Window to assign the underlay window
screens to the base window.
5. Click OK. Click Close on the Window Setting dialog box.

Rules That Apply to Underlay Windows

Please note the rules that apply when you use the underlay window feature:
• Only the objects of an underlay window are displayed on the base window. All background
information about the underlay window (i.e. background color, frame color and size, etc.) are not
displayed on the base window.
• Active objects can be ‘overlaid’ on top of each other over two or more underlay windows. For
example, a Set Bit object that is configured to set an OIT local bit LB0 is located at X=20, Y=50 for
Underlay Window #1. Another Set Bit object that controls LB1 is placed on Underlay Window #2
at the same location. When the Base Window displays these two windows, both objects will be
active so that when they are pressed both LB0 and LB1 will be set.
• Static objects may be overlaid using underlay windows. However, any static object that is on the
Base Window has the highest precedence and will be displayed over any static objects that are on
the underlay windows. Active objects have higher precedence over static objects.
• Popup windows cannot display underlay windows.
• Underlay windows are always positioned from the top left corner of the screen. Any position
settings you make when creating the underlay window are ignored when the window is displayed
by a Base Window as an underlay window.
For more information and an example of how to use underlay windows, consult the EasyBuilder Help files.
Creating a Frame
EasyBuilder provides the option of having a frame around any window that you create. You can a frame from 0-16
pixels wide in any of EasyBuilder's 65K available colors. The default setting is no frame.
Window Background
You can also select a different background color for each window created. The default setting is black.
4To select a different background color
1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.
2. Click on the window that you wish to change the background color. Click Setting. The
Window Setting dialog box appears.
3. In the Background frame section, check the Filled box.
4. Click the pull-down arrow of the Color box. The Color dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
123 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

5. Select from one of the 16 basic colors or add new colors from the customized list of colors.
To create a customized color, click on one of the boxes in the Customized color box, then
click Customize color.
6. The color table dialog box appears allowing you to select one of the colors available.
7. Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box. Click Close
to return to the EasyBuilder main screen.
Instead of using a solid background color, you can select a pattern that is displayed in the background of a window.
4To select a background pattern
1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.
2. Click on the window that you wish to change the background pattern. Click Setting. The
Window Setting dialog box appears.
3. In the Background frame section, check the Filled box.
4. Click the pull-down arrow of the Color box. The Color dialog box appears.
5. Select from one of the 16 basic colors or add new colors from the customized list of colors.
To create a customized color, click on one of the boxes in the Customized color box, then
click Customize color.
6. The color table dialog box appears allowing you to select one of the colors available.
7. Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box.
8. Click the pull-down arrow of the Pattern Color box and select a color. Note: to use the
background pattern, the color selected for Pattern Color must be different then the color
selected for the solid color.
9. Once a pattern color is selected, click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window
Setting dialog box.
10. Click the pull-down arrow of the Pattern box. The Pattern Style dialog box appears.
11. Select the pattern you wish to use, then click OK. The Window Setting dialog box reappears.
12. Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box. Click Close
to return to the EasyBuilder main screen.

Deleting a Window
š Before any window can be deleted from a project, the window must be closed. To close
a window, see the section earlier in this chapter on opening windows.
4To delete a window
1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.
2. Highlight the window that you wish to delete.
3. Click the Delete command. A dialog box appears asking if you want to delete this window.
4. Click Yes. The dialog box disappears and the selected window is deleted.
5. Click Close in the Open Window dialog box to go back to the EasyBuilder main screen.
š If the Delete button does not appear when the window is highlighted, this means that
this is a Window that can't be deleted. Typically, if you are unable to delete a window,
it is because it is one of the predefined windows discussed earlier in this chapter.

Using Base Windows

Of the four types of windows, base windows are the most commonly used. A base window is used to create a full
screen window or a popup (partially sized) window. Popup windows can also be moved about on the OIT display
and can overlap each other. The number of objects that can be placed onto each base window is limited only by the
total amount of memory available within the OIT.

How to Display Base Windows

Base windows can be displayed on the OIT screen by using a function key to display the window or by using the
PLC to call up the window.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 124

Using a Function Key

The Function Key Object is a graphic touch object that is placed onto a window to perform an action. Function keys
have many purposes that are discussed in later sections, but two actions that a function key can perform are:
• Calling a full screen window
• Calling a popup window
Calling a full screen window
If a function key object is created to call a full screen window, the window that is displayed replaces all other
windows that are on display regardless of how many are open; therefore, think of calling a full screen window as
performing two actions -- closing any open windows and displaying a full screen window.
4To call a full screen window using a function key object
1. From the Objects menu, select Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box
appears.
2. In the General Tab, click the Change Window option button.
3. In the same frame, enter the Window No. you want to call.
4. Select the Shape tab, click on the shape or bitmap checkbox, and then click on the Shape
library. Select the shape or bitmap you wish to use to represent the function key and click
OK.
5. Select the Label tab.
6. Check Use label and select a label for the function key.
6. Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
7. Place the function key object where you want it on the window you are editing.
You must select a window that is full size when using the Change Window function.
Calling a popup window
If a function key object is created to call a popup window, the window that is displayed is generally overlaid over all
other windows that are on display. Think of calling a popup window as opening another active window for display.
4To call a popup window using a function key object
1. From the Objects menu, select Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box
appears.
2. In the General Tab, check the Display Popup Window option button. Note that the "Close
this popup window when change full-screen window" checkbox will cause the popup to close
automatically whenever the base window changes.
3. In the same frame, enter the Window No. you want to call.
4. In the Shape tab, click on the shape or bitmap checkbox, then click on the Shape library or
Bitmap library. Select the shape or bitmap you wish to use to represent the function key.
5. In the Label tab, select a label for the function key.
6. Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
7. Place the function key object where you want it on the window you are editing.
You must select a window that is less than full size when using the Popup Window function.
To display a full screen or popup window, press the touchscreen where the function key object is located. The
window displays in the location on the OIT display as determined by the X and Y position in the Window Settings
box for that window.
š For more information on using the Function Key object, see the chapter on
“Representing Data with Graphics Objects”.

Using the PLC to display a base window

Three objects are used by the PLC to call or display a base window. The PLC Control Object is used by the PLC to
display full screen windows. The Direct and Indirect Window Objects are used by the PLC to display popup
windows.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
125 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The PLC Control Object

The PLC can display a full screen window by using the PLC Control Object. This object allows the OIT to
continuously scan a PLC register to display a full screen window, which corresponds to the number in the PLC
register.
Once the OIT displays a full screen that is requested by the PLC Control Object, the OIT will automatically write
the number of the requested screen to the next consecutive register. For example, if you assign internal data register
LW10 to a PLC Control Object/Change Window and the number 3 is placed into this register, then the OIT will
display Screen #3. Finally, it will put the number 3 into LW11. This allows the PLC to confirm that the Screen has
been properly displayed by the OIT.
You can create as many PLC Control Objects as you need -- each object is universal and is not dependent upon
which OIT screen is currently on display.
4To call a full screen window using the PLC Control object
1. From the Objects menu, select PLC Control. The PLC Control Object dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 126

2. Click New.... The PLC Control dialog appears.

3. Select the Device type and Device Address for the actual PLC address you wish to monitor.
š The OIT will write the number of the newly-displayed window to the next consecutive
address after the address specified in this step.

4. Select the format from the drop down menu (16-bit or 32-bit unsigned, signed or BCD).
5. Click OK to return to the PLC Control Object dialog box.
6. You will see a new entry that lists the PLC address that is monitored by the OIT.
The PLC must only enter window numbers that represent full size windows when using the PLC Control Object
function. The OIT automatically closes any open windows before the window called by the PLC Control Object is
displayed.
The Direct and Indirect Window Objects
If you want the PLC to call up a popup window that is to be overlaid on top of other windows already open, then
there are two methods used to do this:
• Direct Window Object
• Indirect Window Object
š Unlike the PLC Control Object, the Direct and Indirect Window Objects are only active
for the windows into which they are placed.
The Direct Window Object is used to display a popup window using a PLC coil. The OIT continuously reads the
value of the PLC coil to determine if it is set to 1. If so, then the predefined popup window is displayed.
The Indirect Window Object is used to display a popup window using a PLC data register. Similar to the PLC
Control Object, the OIT continuously monitors the selected PLC data register. It will display any popup window
that corresponds to the number placed into the PLC data register by the PLC.
The PLC must reference a window that is less than full size when using the Direct Window and Indirect Window
objects.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
127 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To call a popup window using the Direct Window Object

1. From the Objects menu, select Direct Window. The New Direct Window Object dialog box
appears.

2. Select the PLC address according to Device type from the drop down menu and then enter the
address .
3. Select the Window No. you want to call from the drop down menu under the Attribute
heading.
4. Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder. The mouse cursor will have a square
object that represents the size of the popup window.
5. Place the Direct Window object where you want the popup window to appear.
6. You can resize the object after you have placed it by clicking on the object and dragging on
the sizing handles.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 128

4To call a popup window using the Indirect Window Object

1. From the Objects menu, select Indirect Window. The New Indirect Window Object dialog
box appears.

2. Select the PLC address according to Device Type and Address.

3. Select the format from the drop down menu.
4. Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder. The mouse cursor will have a square
object that represents the size of the popup window.
5. Place the Indirect Window object where you want the popup window to appear.
6. You can resize the object after you have placed it by clicking on it and dragging on the sizing
handles.
Tips and Suggestions
Having trouble deciding which method to use to display a base window? Here are some suggestions:
• If you want to clear the OIT display of all open windows and display a new full screen
window, then use the PLC Control Object function or select the Change Window option in the
Function Key Object. The PLC Control Object is global (meaning it does not matter which
windows are currently on display), so the OIT will always monitor the PLC address that you have
selected. The Function Key Object can be made local to one or more windows by placing the
object on only those windows. It can also be made global (meaning the OIT operator can always
change to this window no matter which window is currently displayed), by placing the Function
Key Object on the Common Window or the Fast Selection Window in the Task Bar, (more about
these later in this chapter).

1010-1007W, Rev 06
129 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

• If you want to display a popup window on one particular full screen window, then try using the
Popup Window option in the Function Key Object. This is particularly useful if you want the OIT
operator to control the ability to display the popup window. If you want the PLC to determine
when to display the popup window, then try using the Direct Window object.
• If you want to display a popup window that can be shown on any full screen window, then try
using the Popup Window option in the Function Key Object. You should place the Function Key
Object in the Fast Selection Window with the Task Bar enabled, (more information is available on
the Task Bar later in this chapter). This will allow the OIT operator access to that popup window
regardless of which full screen window is displayed. If you want to display the popup window only
when some condition in the PLC has occurred, then try using the Direct Window object on the
Common Window, (more about the common window later in this chapter).
• If you want to display one of many possible popup windows on any full screen window, then
try using the Indirect Window object on the Common Window. You can then let the PLC
determine which popup window should be displayed or you can create several Set Word objects to
allow the OIT operator to select which window to look at, (more about the Set Word object in a
succeeding chapter).
Returning to a previous window
You can configure a function key to display the full-sized base window that was on the OIT screen before the
currently shown window. Perform the following:
4Create a function key to return to previous window
1. From the Objects menu, select Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the Return to Previous option button.
3. Configure the rest of the function key, and then click OK.
4. Place the function key object onto the full-sized base screen.

š Placing a ‘return to previous’ function key onto a popup window will not work.

Using a function key to close a window

You can configure a function key to close any popup window that is currently displayed on the OIT screen, and was
called by a function key:
4Create a function key to close a window
1. From the Objects menu, select Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the Close Window option button.
3. Configure the rest of the function key, and then click OK.
4. Place the function key object onto the popup window.

š Placing a ‘close window’ function key onto a full-size base screen will not work. To
close a direct window, turn off the controlling bit. To close an indirect window, write a
0 to the controlling register.

Using the Common Window

Your project might require that some data be displayed on the OIT screen at all times, regardless of which
window(s) are displayed. For example, you may want to display a company logo on the OIT screen at all times, or
you may want to display some critical data or an alarm message which should be seen no matter what windows are
displayed.
Using base windows to display this information requires that you configure every full screen base window with the
same graphics object. The common window however, is a predefined window in the OIT that you can enable to
display this information. When created, the common window always operates in the background as a full screen
window that overlays any full screen base window displayed.
Whenever you create a new project, the common window (Window #4) is automatically created.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 130

4 To Access the common window

1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.

2. Highlight Window #4, Common Window and click Settings. The Window Setting dialog
box appears.

3. As you can see, some of the parameters for a common window are disabled and cannot be
changed. Window #4 is always reserved for the common Window. Although the
Background settings are active, none of these settings affects the operation of the common
window.
4. Press OK. The Open Window dialog box reappears with the Common Window selected.
5. If you wish to open the common window, click Open. Otherwise, click Close to return to
the main screen of EasyBuilder.
Displaying the common window above/below the base screen
This setting resolves the conflict that can occur if a graphics object on the common window occupies the same space
on the OIT display as a graphics object on a base screen. Using the Above base screen attribute forces the graphics
object on the common window to cover the base window graphics object. Using Below base screen has the
opposite effect.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
131 Silver Plus Series Installation & Operation Manual

Common Window Base Window

When above base screen is set, the result is:

When below base screen is set, the result is:

4To set the above/below base screen option for a common window
1. From the Edit menu, select System Parameters. The Set System Parameters dialog box
appears.
2. Select the General tab. In the Option frame box under common window, select either Above
base window or Below base window for the Attribute box.
3. Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
š Active graphics objects (objects that display information or graphics according to a
data value in a PLC register or coil) take precedence over passive graphics objects

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 132

(objects such as circles, lines, rectangles, etc.). Therefore, a Set Word object on a base
window will cover a Rectangle object on a common window which occupies the same
space even with the Above base screen attribute enabled.

Changing the Active Common Window

Although only one common window can be on the OIT display at one time, you do have the ability to create
multiple common windows by using base windows as common windows. Then, with the help of a Function Key
object, the OIT operator can change the active common window.
The ability to change the common window adds more flexibility to your project should you need it. For example,
you may have a series of full screen windows which all need a keypad for entry. Another series of full screen
windows may require a common alarm message. By changing the common window with each series of windows,
you can customize each common window to contain only the graphics objects that are needed.
4 To change the active common window
1. Create a common window.
2. Create a base window that is full screen. This will be used as another common window.
Note that when a base window is used as a common window, the Start Pos:, Style, Frame,
and Background settings are ignored by the OIT. For this example, let’s use Window#30 as
the alternate common window.
3. Create another full screen base window that can be displayed along with the common
windows, (such as a startup window). Let’s use Window#10, the initial window, for our
example.
4. On Window#10, create a Function Key object that is used to change the common window.
From the Objects menu, click Function Key. The New Function Key Object dialog box
appears.
5. On the General tab, select the Change Common Window option button.
6. In the same frame, select 30 from the Window no drop down menu.
7. Click the Shape tab. Click Use Shape.... and then click on the Shape Library… command.
Select Shape#19 from the button1 library. Click OK to return to the Create Function Key
Object dialog box.
8. Click the Label tab. Click the Use label checkbox.
9. For our example, type CCW (meaning Change Common Window) into the Content box.
Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box and go back to the EasyBuilder
main screen.
10. Place the new Function Key object somewhere on Window #10.
Below is an illustration of what the default common window, Window#30 (alternate common window), and
Window#10 (startup window) might look like:

Default Common Window #30 Window #10

1010-1007W, Rev 06
133 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

When the OIT initializes, it displays the startup screen (Window #10) and the default common window.

To change common windows, we press the CCW function key that we have configured to change the common
window to Window#30.

Window#30 remains the common window until another function key object is pressed that changes the common
window or until the OIT is reset.

Using the Fast Selection Window

In the last section, you read that common windows are great for displaying information that should be displayed all
the time, regardless of which base windows are active. You may also create projects that require a window that is
always accessible (like a common window) but not always displayed. For example, you may want a numeric
keypad available for any data entry; however, a keypad takes precious space on the OIT display. Ideally it should
appear on screen only when a key was pressed and then, by pressing another (or the same) key, the keypad should
disappear.
This is essentially the purpose of the Fast Selection window. The Fast Selection window can also be used as a menu
key that allows the OIT operator to rapidly switch screens.
Whenever a new project is created, the fast selection window (Window #3) is automatically created.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 134

4 To open a fast selection window:

1. From the Window menu, select Open Window. The Open Window dialog box appears.

2. Highlight the Fast Selection Window and click Settings. The Window Setting dialog box
appears.

3. The Name: and Window No.: are reserved to identify the Fast Selection window. The other
parameters can be modified, (see the Window Settings section earlier in this chapter for more
information). Notice that the default size is Width=80 and Height=200. The default was
selected to create a ‘sidebar’ that contains function keys to display other windows. The
example below illustrates how the Fast Selection Window can be used for this purpose.
4. Press OK. The Open Window dialog box reappears with the Fast Selection window selected.
5. If you wish to open the fast selection window, click Open. Otherwise, click Close to return
to the main screen of EasyBuilder.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
135 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Using the Fast Selection Key

The fast selection key is used to display the Fast Selection window. Pressing the key again causes the Fast Selection
window to close.

Creating the Fast Selection Key

The fast selection key must be activated in System Parameters in order to have it display on the OIT. The fast
selection key will always display on the operator interface.
4 To display the fast selection key
1. Select Edit-System Parameters. The System Parameters Setting Dialog appears. Select the
General tab.

2. In the Fast selection button section, select Enable from the Attribute drop down menu.
3. Select either right or left from the Position drop down menu to select whether the button will
appear in the right lower corner or left lower corner of the display.
4. Click Settings... Click the Use shape checkbox, and then select Shape Library…
5. Select a shape for your fast selection button and click OK.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 136

6. Click OK.

Changing screens using the Fast Selection window

One of the more useful purposes of the Fast Selection window is to use it as a ‘menu’ key for switching screens on
the OIT display. The following example illustrates how you might create a Fast Selection window for this purpose.
The example steps you through creating six full-screen base windows, enabling the Task Bar, and creating a Fast
Selection window to call up the six screens.
We will start with the following six screens.

Next, create a new Fast Selection window using default settings. For this example, we will create six Function Key
objects that change windows. Configure each Function Key object with the Change Window attribute and place
the object into the Fast Selection window.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
137 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Finally, the Task Bar must be enabled, (see the next section for instructions). After downloading the project file to
the OIT, the following initial screen should be shown.

Press the Fast Selection key to activate the Fast Selection window.

Press one of the Function Keys to switch to another full screen window.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Windows 138

Finally, pressing the Fast Selection Key will remove the Fast Selection Window until it is needed again.

As you can see, the Fast Selection window, though not seen, is always readily available.

š The Fast Selection window can only call full screen windows not popup windows.
Therefore, you cannot use Function Key objects with the Popup Window attribute in
Fast Selection windows.

System Message Window

EasyBuilder has two Windows designated as System Message windows - Window #5 is designated as the PLC
Response Window that pops up automatically when the OIT loses communications with the PLC.

Window #6 is designated as the HMI Response window, which will pop up automatically with the OIT loses
communications with a another OIT that is remotely connected.

Both of these windows have been pre-configured with automated messages and a function key to close the window,
so no changes are necessary.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
139 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 140

Chapter 8 - Creating Graphic Objects

Drawing Objects
To display any graphics objects on the OIT screen you must either create them using the drawing tools included
with EasyBuilder, import them from another applications program, or select from the many choices available in the
graphics libraries included with EasyBuilder.
This chapter shows you how to create, use, and save graphics objects in EasyBuilder. You have learned from
previous chapters how graphics objects are placed onto windows. In this chapter, we concentrate on how to create
graphics objects.

Using the Drawing Tools

Several drawing tools are provided in EasyBuilder to make it easier to create graphics objects. With these tools, you
can create simple geometric shapes such as straight lines, circles, rectangles, and polygonal shapes. You can also
combine several various geometric shapes to form complex shapes that can be stored into one of the graphics
libraries for later retrieval.
The Line Tool
Use the Line tool to create straight lines on a window. Each line that you create has three parameters associated
with it: length, thickness, and color.
4To create a line
1. From the Draw menu, click Line or click the Line icon in the Draw toolbar. The Properties
dialog box appears.

2. Click the pull down box from the Color box. The Color dialog box appears.
3. Click on the appropriate color box, then click OK. The color box should reflect what you
have chosen.
4. Click on the line thickness that you want to use.
5. Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are
currently editing. The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor.
6. Click to mark the beginning of the line. Move the mouse to the location where the end of the
line should be. Click the mouse cursor again to mark the end of the line. The line object is
formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the
boundaries of the line.
7. To continue creating more lines repeat the last step. To move the line just created, click on
the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar. Move the
line to the preferred location.
8. To change any of the attributes, double-click on the line to display the Line Object’s
Attribute dialog box.
The Rectangle Tool
The rectangle tool is used to create rectangles or squares. Each rectangle created has four parameters associated
with it: size, thickness, color, and filled.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
141 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create a rectangle

1. From the Draw menu, click Rectangle or click the Rectangle icon in the Draw toolbar. The
Attributes dialog box appears.
2. If the interior of the rectangle is to be filled with a color, check the Filled box. Two
additional settings appear.
3. If you want to fill the rectangle with a solid color, then select a color for the Interior box.
Click Pattern Style to display the Pattern Style dialog box. Select the upper left-most
pattern for a solid color. If you want to use a pattern for the filled section of the rectangle,
then select from the available patterns, and click OK to exit the Pattern Style dialog box. In
the Attributes dialog box, select the Pattern color.
4. In the Frame section, click the pull-down arrow of the Color box and select a color. Click
OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box.
5. Click on the line thickness that you want to use.
6. Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are
currently editing. The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor.
7. Click to mark a corner of the rectangle. Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the
rectangle should be. Click the mouse cursor again to mark the corner of the rectangle. The
rectangle object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square
blocks around the perimeter of the rectangle.
8. To continue creating more rectangles repeat the last step. To move the rectangle just created,
click on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar.
Move the rectangle to the preferred location.
9. To change any of the attributes, double-click on the rectangle to display the Rectangle
Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The Ellipse/Circle Tool

The ellipse tool is used to create ellipses or circles. Each ellipse created has four parameters associated with it: size,
thickness, color, and filled.
4To create an ellipse
1. From the Draw menu, click Ellipse/Circle or click the Ellipse/Circle icon in the Draw
toolbar. The Attributes dialog box appears.
2. If the interior of the ellipse is to be filled with a color, check the Filled box. Two additional
settings appear.
3. If you want to fill the ellipse with a solid color, then select a color for the Interior box. Click
Pattern Style to display the Pattern Style dialog box. Select the upper left-most pattern for a
solid color. If you want to use a pattern for the filled section of the ellipse, then select from
the available patterns, and click OK to exit the Pattern Style dialog box. In the Attributes
dialog box, select the Pattern color.
4. In the Frame section, click the pull-down arrow of the Color box and select a color. Click
OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box.
5. Click on the line thickness that you want to use.
6. Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are
currently editing. The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor.
7. Click to mark a corner of the ellipse. Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the
ellipse should be. Click the mouse cursor again to mark the ellipse. The ellipse object is
formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the
perimeter of the ellipse.
8. To continue creating more ellipses repeat the last step. To move the ellipse just created, click
on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar. Move
the ellipse to the preferred location.
9. To change any of the attributes, double-click on the ellipse to display the Ellipse Object’s
Attribute dialog box.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 142

The Arc Tool

The arc tool is used to create arcs. Each arc created has three parameters associated with it: size, thickness, and
color.
4 To create an arc
1. From the Draw menu, click Arc or click the Arc icon in the Draw toolbar. The Attributes
dialog box appears.
2. In the Frame section, click the pull-down arrow of the Color box and select a color. Click
OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box.
3. Click on the line thickness that you want to use.
4. Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are
currently editing. The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor.
5. Click to mark a corner of the arc. Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the arc
should be. Click the mouse cursor again to mark the arc. The arc object is formed and
displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the
arc.
6. To continue creating more arcs repeat the last step. To move the arc, click on the Select
option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar. Move the arc to the
preferred location.
7. To change any of the attributes, double-click on the arc to display the Arc Object’s Attribute
dialog box.
The Polygon Tool
The polygon tool is used to create polygons. Each polygon created has four parameters associated with it: size,
thickness, color, and filled.
4To create a polygon
1. From the Draw menu, click Polygon. Or click the Polygon icon in the Draw toolbar. The
Attributes dialog box appears.
2. If the interior of the polygon is to be filled with a color, check the Filled box. Two additional
settings appear.
3. If you want to fill the polygon with a solid color, then select a color for the Interior box.
Click Pattern Style to display the Pattern Style dialog box. Select the upper left-most
pattern for a solid color. If you want to use a pattern for the filled section of the polygon, then
select from the available patterns, and click OK to exit the Pattern Style dialog box. In the
Attributes dialog box, select the Pattern color.
4. In the Frame section, click the pull-down arrow of the Color box and select a color. Click
OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box.
5. Click on the line thickness that you want to use.
6. Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are
currently editing. The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor.
7. Click to mark a corner of the polygon. Move the mouse to where another corner of the
polygon should be. Click the mouse cursor again to mark the corner. Continue clicking each
corner until it is time to connect the last corner to the first corner of the polygon. Right click
to complete the polygon. The polygon object is formed and displayed on the window screen
with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the polygon.
8. To continue creating more polygons repeat the last step. To move the polygon, click on the
Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar. Move the
polygon to the preferred location.
9. To change any of the attributes, double-click on the polygon to display the Polygon Object’s
Attribute dialog box.
The Scale Lines Tool
The Scale Lines tool is used to create scales. Each scale created has four parameters associated with it: size,
thickness, color, and filled.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
143 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create a scale

1. From the Draw menu, click Scale. Or click the Scale icon in the Draw toolbar
2. Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are
currently editing. The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor.
3. Click to mark a corner of the scale. Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the scale
should be. Click the mouse cursor again to mark the corner of the scale. The scale object is
formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the
perimeter of the scale.
4. From the Edit menu, select Change Attribute. The Scale Object’s Attribute dialog box
appears.
5. In the Frame section of the Style tab, click the pull-down arrow of the Color box and select a
color. Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Scale Object’s Attribute dialog
box.
6. Click on the line thickness that you want to use.
7. In the Scale section, select from one of the six Styles:

Up Down Full ¾ Size Horizontal Vertical

8. Enter the number of divisions in the Division: box. For Up, Down, Full, and ¾ Size enter
the Meter Length.
9. Adjust the size and position of the scale in the Profile tab, if necessary.
10. Click OK. The Scale Object’s Attribute closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder reappears
with the Scale Object displayed. Scale lines are most often used when creating bar graphs,
scale meters, and trend graphs.
The Free Line Tool
The Free Line Tool allows you to draw lines in a free form fashion. .
4 To draw a free-form line
1. From the Draw menu, select Arbitrary line or click on the Free line icon on the draw tool
bar. The Properties dialog appears.
2. Configure any line properties including color and line width.
3. Move your cursor over EasyBuilder's design space. The cursor will turn into a crosshair.
When the crosshair is placed where you would like to begin your free line, left click your
mouse.
4. Move your mouse along the path that you would like to draw your free line. This can include
any path - including a squiggly line, crossing over itself, etc. When you have completed your
line, right click your mouse button.
5. You may repeat steps 1-4 to continue drawing free lines, or you may click the Select icon on
the Draw toolbar, and then double click on your free lines to change any of the objects
attributes.
The Pie Tool
The pie tool allows you to draw a section of a circle -from 1O-360O .
4 To use the pie tool
1. Select Pie from the Draw menu or select the Pie icon from the draw tool bar. The Properties
dialog appears.
2. Configure any properties for your shape, including line and fill.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 144

3. Move your cursor over the EasyBuilder work area. A crosshair will appear. Move your
crosshair to where you would like your shape to appear.
4. Click and hold your mouse cursor while dragging to form a circle. When the circle is the size
you wish it to be, release the left mouse button.
5. Now, left click again, and a line will appear. This is the starting point of your pie. Move
along the arc of the circle until you get the shape of the pie that you want and left click again.

6. You may continue creating pie shapes, or click on the select icon and select the pie to resize it
or configure its attributes.
The Linked Line Tool
The linked line tool allows you to draw lines that are linked end to end.
4 To use the linked line tool
1. Select Link line from the Draw menu or select the Linked line tool from the draw toolbar.
The Properties dialog appears.
2. Configure any properties for your line.
3. Move your cursor over the EasyBuilder work area. A crosshair will appear. Move your
crosshair to where you would like to begin your lines.
4. Click your mouse to begin your line. Move your mouse to the point where you would like
your first line to end and your next line to begin and click your mouse again. Repeat this step
until you are done drawing lines. Right click your mouse to stop drawing lines.
5. You may continue creating linked lines or click on the select icon and select the linked lines
to move them or configure their attributes.

Using Text
EasyBuilder uses Windowsâ TrueTypeâ Fonts. This means that you can use any fonts that you have available to
you in your Microsoft Windows, including Unicode characters for foreign fonts.
Text sizing is available from 8 to 144 pixels, and text can be blinking, underlined or italic. Text can be used in
object labels or placed onscreen in text boxes.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
145 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create a text box

1. From the Draw menu, click Text. Or click the Text icon in the Draw toolbar. The New Text
Object dialog box appears.

2. Select the font from the Font: drop down menu.

3. Select color and size from their respective drop down menus.
4. Select the type of justification in Align: box. If you'd like the text to blink, select it in the
Blink: drop-down menu. You may also check either Italic or Underline for style if you wish.
5. If you'd like the message to be scrolling, select the direction in which you'd like the
movement to occur, and then adjust the movement speed. Check the continuous checkbox if
you'd like the message to scroll continuously, as opposed to just once.
6. In the Content: box, enter the text that you would like to appear in the text box.
7. Click OK. The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the outline of the text box tagged
to the cursor in the upper left corner of the work area.
8. Move the text box to the area you wish to place it on the window and click.
9. The text box appears with small square boxes around the perimeter. Click on another area of
the window to end the edit session or double-click to reedit the text box parameters.

4To change the font size

1. By clicking onto a text box, you can easily change the font size by using the Font: box or the
Enlarge or Reduce buttons on the Manager toolbar.
2. Click on the pull-down box of the Font: box and select one of the font sizes; or,
3. Click the Enlarge button to increase the size of the text box by one font size.
4. Click the Reduce button to decrease the size of the text box by one font size.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 146

5. Note that if the text box overlaps one of the borders of the window when enlarged, then the
command to enlarge the text box is ignored.

Predefined Shapes and Pictures

In addition to using the drawing tools to create your own graphics, EasyBuilder provides several types of predefined
graphics objects: shapes and pictures (bitmaps, JPGs and GIFs including animated GIFs). These graphics objects
can be stored in libraries that come with EasyBuilder, (more on libraries in the next section). All graphics can be
used for the same purpose -- to display a predefined complex graphics object on the OIT screen. The difference
between the types of graphics is how they are composed and stored.
Shapes are vector-based graphics which are stored in files that contain dimensional information about the shape.
Shapes are actually composed of several simpler graphics like the ones created by the drawing tools. Because of
this, they can usually be more easily modified than bitmaps.
Pictures are pixel-based graphics which are stored in files that contain information about each pixel to compose a
graphic. The pixel is the smallest possible detail that you can change on a screen. Because of this, although these
graphics are more difficult to modify, they offer the most flexibility in customizing the graphic object.
In most cases, you won’t need to know the difference between a shape graphic and a pixel-based graphic. You will
base your selection on what looks good. However, keep the following comparisons in mind.

Shapes Pictures
Must be created using a desktop graphics
Ease of Creation Can be created using EasyBuilder
application such as Microsoft PaintTM
Memory Requirements Low High
Quality of picture after changing size Good Fair to Bad
Time required to display on OIT
Quick if not too complex Quick if not too large
screen

Shapes and pictures are used in both passive and active graphics objects. Each shape or picture can be resized or
moved just like any drawing object. The following examples show how to place a pre-defined shape or a picture on
the OIT screen as a passive object. Using shapes and picture with active graphics objects is covered in Chapter 8
“Representing Data with Graphics Objects”. Information on creating new shapes and bitmaps and storing them in
libraries will be covered in a later section of this chapter.

Using a Predefined Shape

You can select from many shapes that are included in the EasyBuilder configuration software. Shapes can be used
for active or passive objects. The following procedure describes using a passive shape object

1010-1007W, Rev 06
147 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4 To use a shape
1. From the Draw menu, click Shape. Or click the Shape icon in the Draw toolbar. The New
Shape Object dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 148

2. Click the Shape library… button. The Shape Library dialog box appears.

3. Choose one of the available libraries in the Library: section.

4. Use the scroll bar to view available shapes. Click on the shape that you want.
5. Click OK The New Shape Object dialog box reappears. The shape that you selected will be
displayed in this dialog box.
6. Click OK. The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with an outline of the shape object in
the upper left corner of the work area.
7. Move the shape to the location desired and click. The shape appears with small square boxes
around the perimeter of the shape.
8. The shape can be resized or you can edit the shape’s parameters by double-clicking to enter
the Shape Object’s Properties dialog box, or by dragging on the resizing handles on the
corners of the object.

Using a Predefined Picture

You can select from many pictures that are included in the EasyBuilder configuration software. Pictures can be
used for active or passive objects. The following procedure describes using a passive picture object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
149 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To use a picture

1. From the Draw menu, click Picture. Or click the Picture icon in the Draw toolbar. The
New Picture Object dialog box appears.

2. Click the Picture library… button. The Picture Library dialog box appears.

3. Choose a library from the Library: section by double clicking.

4. Use the scroll bar to view available bitmaps. Click on the bitmap that you want.
5. Click OK The New Picture Object dialog box reappears. The picture that you selected will
be displayed in this dialog box.
6. Click OK. The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with an outline of the bitmap object in
the upper left corner of the work area.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 150

7. Move the picture to the location desired and click. The picture appears with small square
boxes around the perimeter of the bitmap.
8. The bitmap can be resized or you can edit the bitmap’s parameters by double-clicking to enter
the Bitmap Object’s Properties dialog box.

Graphics Libraries
Graphics Libraries are files that come with EasyBuilder which contain graphics shapes and pictures. Many
predefined shapes and pictures are included with EasyBuilder. In addition, you can create new pictures or shapes
and add them to the libraries. You can even create new libraries as you need them. Each library contains a
maximum of 48 shapes or pictures. Each shape or picture has a maximum of 255 ‘states’ or pictures tied to it.
EasyBuilder allows a maximum of ten bitmap libraries and ten shape libraries to be open per project file. Finally, a
group library can be used to store several graphics objects (such as a keypad) to be easily used when needed. For
example, you may create a bar graph that could be used in several different projects. The bar graph can be stored
into the group library for easy retrieval.
All libraries are accessed from the Library menu or by clicking the appropriate icon in the Standard toolbar.

What are ‘states’?

Many of the graphics objects (ex. Set Word Object or Moving Shape Object) use states to determine which picture
to display. Shapes and pictures can be configured with up to 255 different states.
Each shape can be configured to show a different picture depending upon a ‘state’. States are used when the shape
is tied to an active object that is monitoring a value in a PLC. The state corresponds to the actual value in the PLC
register. For instance, you would use a two-state shape to represent a Bit Lamp object. You can also use a different
picture of a shape for a passive object. Click the State: pull-down box in the Shape or Bitmap library and select a
different number. Most of the predefined shapes in the libraries have at least two states.

Using Shape Libraries

When you start a new project, two libraries (button1 and button2) are automatically open.
4To display the Shape Library dialog box
1. From the Library menu, click Shape, then click Call up library. Or click the Call up Shape
Library icon from the Standard toolbar. The Shape Library dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
151 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The Shape Library provides several options which are discussed in the following sections.
Accessing and Creating Shape Libraries
You can open, close, or even create new shape libraries easily using the Shape Library dialog box.
4To open other shape libraries
1. With the Shape Library dialog box displayed, click Select Lib… The Open dialog box
appears.
2. Select which library you would like to open, then click Open. The Shape Library dialog box
reappears with the selected library displayed.
If the project has ten libraries open, you may want to close a library so that another one may be opened.
4To close or ‘unattach’ an open shape library
1. With the Shape Library dialog box displayed, choose from one of the open libraries of shapes
in the Shape: section.
2. Select which library you would like to close, then click Unattach Lib. A dialog box appears
asking if you really want to unattach the selected library. Click Yes.
3. The Shape Library dialog box reappears and the library is removed from the Shape library:
list.
You have the option of creating a new library. This can be very useful when organizing shapes.
4To create a new shape library
1. With the Shape Library dialog box displayed, click New Lib… The New Library dialog box
appears.
2. Enter a name for the new library. Click OK.
3. The Shape Library dialog box appears with the new library loaded. Click Close.
4. The new library is now available to this project but it is not stored into the Library
subdirectory of EasyBuilder until the project file has been saved.
Creating, deleting and placing shapes
EasyBuilder provides drawing tools that can be used to create shapes. For more information on how to use the
drawing tools, consult the first part of this chapter. The shapes that you create can be permanently stored into the
shape libraries for access by any project.
4 To add a new shape to a library
1. This example shows how to add a two-state shape to a library. You must first create the
shapes that you plan on storing using the drawing tools supplied with EasyBuilder. The
shapes can be any size. You can use any combination of drawing tools to create the shape.

2. Highlight the shape by clicking the mouse and dragging a rectangular outline so that it covers
the entire shape. When you are done, you should see small black squares around the
perimeter of the shape.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 152

3. From the Library menu click Shape, then Save to library. Or click the Save Objects to
Shape Library icon in the Standard toolbar. The Save to Shape Library dialog box appears.

4. Click the Shape library: box and select the library you wish to store the shape in
5. Click the Shape No.: pull-down box to select the location (0) to store the shape. Note that the
State No.: will automatically change to 0, first unused state.
6. Enter a title for the new shape in the Description: box.
7. Select the Frame option button to have the graphic represent the border of the new shape; or
the Inner option to have the graphic represent the interior
8. Click OK. The Shape Library dialog box appears with the shape stored in the library.

9. Click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.

10. From the File menu, click Save to save the shape to the library. Important- you must save
before attempting to store the next shape.
11. Highlight the other shape by clicking the mouse and dragging a rectangular outline so that it
covers the entire shape.
12. Click the Save Objects to Shape Library icon in the Standard toolbar. The Save to Library
dialog box appears.
13. Click the Shape library: box and select the library you wish to store the shape in.
14. Click the Shape No.: pull-down box to select the location (0) to store the shape. Note that the
State No.: will automatically change to state 1, the next available state.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
153 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

15. Click OK. The Shape Library dialog box appears with the shape stored in the library under
State 1.
16. Click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
17. From the File menu, click Save to save the shape to the library.

š When adding new shapes to existing libraries that come with the EZware-5000
software, remember that any future upgrade that you receive from Maple Systems may
overwrite existing libraries during installation. This will delete any new shapes that
you have entered. Therefore, we recommend that you create new libraries to store
these shapes or make backup files of the libraries before installing new upgrades.
4 To delete a shape from a library
1. From the Library menu, click Shape, then Call up library.
2. Select the library that the shape is located in.
3. Click on the shape that you wish to delete from the library.
4. Click Delete. The shape is removed from the library.
5. Click Close to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
6. Save the project file to permanently save changes made to the library. Caution – once project
is saved, the shape is permanently deleted from the library and cannot be replaced.
Finally, you may want to use all or parts of an existing shape to create a new one. To do this, you must first ‘place’
the shape onto the work area of EasyBuilder for editing.
4To place a shape on the work area
1. From the Library menu, click Shape, then Call up library.
2. Select the library in which the shape is located. For this example, select button1.
3. Click on the shape that you want to place on the work area. For this example, select button
number 12.
4. Click Place… The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the shape in the upper-left
corner of the work area.
5. For this example, move the shape to the middle of the work area, as shown.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 154

6. Highlight the shape and separate each separate component.

7. As you can see, this particular shape is composed of six objects. You can edit these objects to
change the shape or create a new shape from these objects. Please note that you are not
actually changing the shape stored in the library. To change the shape, you must delete the
shape and store any changes you make to a new shape.

Using Picture Libraries

EasyBuilder includes picture libraries from which you can select pictures.
4To display the Picture Library dialog box
1. From the Library menu, click Picture, then click Call up library. Or click the Call up
Picture Library icon from the Standard toolbar. The Picture Library dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
155 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The Picture Library provides several options which are discussed in the following sections.
Accessing and Creating Picture Libraries
You can open, close, or even create new picture libraries easily using the Picture Library dialog box.
4 To open other picture libraries
1. With the Picture Library dialog box displayed, click Select Lib… The Open dialog box
appears.
2. Select which library you would like to open, then click Open. The Picture Library dialog box
reappears with the selected library displayed.
If the project has ten libraries open, you may want to close a library so that another one may be opened.
4 To close or ‘unattach’ an open picture library
1. With the Picture Library dialog box displayed, choose from one of the open libraries of
pictures in the library: section.
2. Select which library you would like to close, then click Unattach Lib. A dialog box appears
asking if you really want to unattach the selected library. Click Yes.
3. The Picture Library dialog box reappears and the library is removed from the Library: list.
You have the option of creating a new library. This can be very useful when organizing bitmaps.
4To create a new picture library
1. With the Picture Library dialog box displayed, click New Lib… The New Library dialog box
appears.
2. Enter a name for the new library. Click OK.
3. The Picture Library dialog box appears with the new library loaded. Click Close.
4. The new library is now available to this project but it is not stored into the Library
subdirectory of EasyBuilder until the project file has been saved.
Creating and exporting pictures
Although EasyBuilder does not provide the ability to create bitmaps, the software can import bitmaps created from
some other application program. This allows the ability to use a wide selection of pictures - including bitmaps,
JPGs, GIFS and animated GIFS that can be permanently added to your picture libraries. EasyBuilder accepts
pictures that are up to 65K color resolution.
4 To add a new picture to a library
1. Display the Picture Library dialog box.
2. Select one of the picture libraries from the Library: section.
3. Click on the box location where you would like to enter the new picture.
4. Click Import picture… The Import Picture dialog box displays.

5. The Picture No.: is the location of the picture in the picture file. This should reflect the box
location that you selected in step 4.
6. Enter a title for the new picture in the Picture name: box.
7. Enter the total number of states (max. 255) for the bitmap in the Total states: box.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 156

8. Click Next. The Get Picture dialog displays.

9. Click Browse... to locate the picture to be imported. Once the file is located, it will appear in
the square on the right. Click Finished to import the picture.
8. Click Next. The Get Bitmap Graphics dialog box appears..
9. Click OK again to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder. Place the picture somewhere in
the work area.
10. From the File menu, click Save to permanently save the picture to the library.

š When adding new pictures to existing libraries that come with the EZware-5000
software, remember that any future upgrade that you receive from Maple Systems may
overwrite existing libraries during installation. This will delete any new bitmaps that
you have entered; therefore, we recommend that you create new libraries to store these
pictures or make backup files of the libraries before installing new upgrades.
If you find that some of the pictures included in the libraries are not useful, you have the option of deleting them so
that they may be replaced by another bitmap.
4To delete a picture from a library
1. From the Library menu, click Picture, then Call up library. The Picture Library dialog box
appears.
2. Select the library that the picture is located in.
3. Click on the picture that you wish to delete from the library.
4. Click Delete picture. The bitmap is removed from the library.
5. Click Close to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
6. Save the project file to permanently save changes made to the library. Caution – once the
project is saved, the picture is permanently deleted from the library.
Finally, you may want to export a picture located in one of the picture libraries so that it can be modified or used in
other programs.
4 To export a picture
1. From the Library menu, click Picture, then Call up library. The Picture Library dialog box
appears.
2. Select the library that the picture is located in.
3. Click on the picture that you want to export.
4. Click Export… The Save As dialog box appears.
5. In the File name: box, enter a file name to which you wish to store the picture.
6. Click Save. The picture is saved and the Picture Library reappears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
157 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

7. Click Close to exit the Picture Library.

Using Group Libraries

Any graphics object or objects displayed on the work area of EasyBuilder can be grouped together and stored into a
group library. Graphics objects can be passive or active. The groups that you create can be permanently stored into
the group libraries for access by any project. Creating group objects often saves a lot of time when creating new
projects because you can use the same objects repeatedly. For example, suppose you regularly use a scale meter
similar to the following:

This one scale meter is actually composed of five objects.

Rather than waste time recreating this scale meter for each new application, it would be much easier to store the
meter into a group library.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 158

4To display the Group Library dialog box

1. From the Library menu, click Group, then click Call up library. Or click the Call up Group
Library icon from the Standard toolbar. The Group Library dialog box appears.

The Group Library provides several options which are discussed in the following sections.
Accessing and Creating Group Libraries
Group libraries can be opened and closed easily using the Group Library dialog box. It is even possible to create
new group libraries.
4To open other group libraries
1. With the Group Library dialog box displayed, click Select Lib… The Open dialog box
appears.
2. Select which library you would like to open, then click Open. The Group Library dialog box
reappears with the selected library displayed.
If the project has ten libraries open, you may want to close a library so that another one may be opened.
4 To close or ‘unattach’ an open group library
1. With the Group Library dialog box displayed, click the pull-down box of Library Name: and
choose from one of the open libraries of groups.
2. Select which library you would like to close, then click Unattach Lib. A dialog box appears
asking if you really want to unattach the selected library. Click Yes.
3. The Group Library dialog box reappears and the library is removed from the Group library:
list.
The option of creating a new library is also available. This can be very useful when organizing groups.
4To create a new group library
1. With the Group Library dialog box displayed, click New Lib… The New Library dialog box
appears.
2. Enter a name for the new library. Click OK.
3. The Group Library dialog box appears with the new library loaded. Click Close.
4. The new library is now available to this project but it is not stored into the Library
subdirectory of EasyBuilder until the project file has been saved.
Creating, deleting and placing groups
Once a complex group object has been created, it must be stored permanently into a group library where it can be
retrieved and used in multiple projects. At any time, it is possible to place a group object onto the work area of
EasyBuilder for usage or editing.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
159 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To add a new group to a library

1. Highlight the group object by clicking the mouse and dragging a rectangular outline so that it
covers the entire group. When you are done, you should see small black squares around the
perimeter of the group. For this example, the scale meter shown at the beginning of this
section is highlighted.
2. From the Library menu click Group, then Save to library. Or click the Save to Group
Library icon in the Standard toolbar. The Save to Library dialog box appears.

3. Click the Group library: box and select the library you wish to store the group in, (for this
example meters).
4. Click the Group No.: pull-down box to select the location to store the group. Note that the
Group No.: will automatically change to 0, (first group not used).
5. Enter a title for the new group in the Description: box.
6. Click OK. The Group Library dialog box appears with the group stored in the library.

7. Notice that any shape or bitmap libraries used to create the group object are listed for your
reference in the Including library box.
8. Click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
9. From the File menu, click Save to permanently save the group to the library.

š When adding new group objects to existing group libraries that come with the
EZware-5000 software, remember that any future upgrade that you receive from Maple
Systems may overwrite existing libraries during installation. This will delete any new
group objects that you have entered. Therefore, we recommend that you create new
libraries to store these group objects or make backup files of the libraries before
installing new upgrades.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 160

If you find that some of the groups included in the libraries are not useful, you have the option of deleting them so
that they may be replaced by another group.
4 To delete a group from a library
1. From the Library menu, click Group, then Call up library.
2. Select the library that the group is located in.
3. Click on the group that you wish to delete from the library.
4. Click Delete. The group is removed from the library.
5. Click Close to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder.
6. Save the project file to permanently save changes made to the library. Caution – once a
project is saved, the group is permanently deleted from the library and cannot be replaced.
Finally, to place a group object onto the work area for use or editing, do the following.
4 To place a group on the work area
1. From the Library menu, click Group, then Call up library.
2. Select the library in which the group is located. For this example, select keypad.
3. Click on the group that you want to place on the work area. For this example, select item 0.
4. Click Place… The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the group in the upper-left
corner of the work area.
5. Move the group object to the preferred location on the window.
This completes our discussion on creating shapes, bitmaps, and group objects with EasyBuilder. This chapter also
provided some examples on how to use the drawing tools. The next several chapters describe the many parts or
active graphics objects that can be placed onto windows.
There is one other type of library that we will discuss here. Although it is not a graphic, sound libraries work in
much the same way that all of the other libraries do, and therefore fit into our discussion of libraries.

Using Sound Libraries

The Silver Series can import and play WAV files to signal alarm conditions or to be linked to a PLC control object.
These sounds can be found and stored in sound libraries. Objects that can have sounds linked can be configured in
the individual object.
Accessing and Creating Sound Libraries
Sound libraries can be easily accessed and opened using the Sound Library dialog.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
161 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To open access the sound libraries:

1. Select Library - Sound. The Sound Library dialog appears.

2. Click Select Lib. ... and select a library. Click okay. Now the library dialog will show with
the list populated.
4 To preview the sounds in the library:
1. Select Library-Sound. The Sound library dialog appears.
2. Highlight the sound that you would like to preview.
3. Click Play.
4 To create a sound library:
1. Select Library-Sound. The Sound Library dialog appears.
2. Click New Lib… the New library dialog appears.
3. Type a name for your library.
4. Click OK.
Importing and Exporting WAV files
4 To import a WAV file for use in sound libraries
1. Select Library-Sound to display the Sound Library dialog.
2. Click Import. The Open file dialog appears.
3. Browse to the sound that you want to import and click Open.
4 To export a WAV file for use in other applications
1. Select Library-Sound to display the Sound Library dialog.
2. Highlight the WAV to export from the library table and click Export... The Save in.. dialog
appears.
3. Browse to the file location where you will save the sound and type a name for the sound.
Click Save.
Deleting and Unattaching Sounds and Sound Libraries
4 To delete a sound from the sound library:
1. Select Library-Sound to display the Sound Library dialog.
2. Highlight the sound that you would like to delete.
3. Click Delete…

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating Graphic Objects 162

4. Select File...Save. You must save the project in order for the delete to be permanent.
4 To unattach a sound library:
1. Select Library-Sound. The Sound Library dialog appears.
2. Click Unattach Lib.
3. A dialog pops up asking if you really want to unattach the library. Click Yes.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
163 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating and Using Databases and Languages 164

Chapter 9 - Creating and Using Databases and Languages

EasyBuilder includes the ability to create and use both a Tag Database Library and a Label Database Library. The
Tag Library is a database of PLC register addresses. Once created, the Tag Database allows individual object
address assigning through Tag selection from the Tag Library. The Label Library is a database of text labels. Once
created, the Label Database allows individual object text labeling through Label selection from the Label Library.
The Label text may also be represented in up to eight languages, each selectable for display.

Creating and Using the Tag Library

The Tag Library is a database of register addresses, with each tag representing a single address. EasyBuilder gives
you the option of using either Customized or System tags. Customized tags are tags that you build yourself. System
tags are predefined tags that allow access to certain built-in functions and settings. You can select whether you will
be using customized or system tags in the Address Tag Library dialog. The Tag listing does not contain display
information, as display attributes are set when the individual object using the Tag listing is created.

4To create a Tag Database Library

1. From the Library menu, click Tag..., or click the Address Tag Library Manager button from
the Standard toolbar. The Address Tag Library dialog appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
165 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. To create a new Tag listing, click the New… button to display the Tag dialog.

3. Enter the new Tag name. Tag names may be up to 100 characters, any character.
4. Select the PLC name: as configured in the Device Table from the drop down menu.
5. Select the Address type (Bit or Word) from the drop down menu..
6. Select the Device type from the drop down menu.
7. Enter the Register Address.
8. Click OK.
9. Make additional entries to the database by repeating the procedure.
4To delete a tag:
1. Open the Tag Library as directed above.
2. Select the tag to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
4To modify a tag:
1. Open the Tag Library as directed above.
2. Select the tag to edit.
3. Click the Settings.. button.
4. Edit as applicable and then click OK.

Importing and Exporting the Tag Library

This feature allows tags from the tag library to be saved into a .tgl file format. Once saved, the file can be loaded
into another project.
4To save the tag library:
1. Click on Save Tag File... The Open dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data.
3. Click Open.
4To load the Tag Library from an existing .tgl file:
1. Click on the Load Tag File...The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse for the .tgl file that contains the tags.
3. Click Open.
š The .tgl file format can not be edited.
The tag library can also be imported and exported using a comma-separated variable (.csv) file format. This format
is very useful if you need to make several changes to the database; or, if creating a new project, it is easier and faster
to create and edit the tags in a .csv file.
4To export the tag library to a .csv file:
1. Click Export CSV. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data.
3. Click Open.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating and Using Databases and Languages 166

4To import the tag library from a .csv file:

1. Click Import CSV… The open dialog box appears.
2. Brows for the CSV file containing the tags.
3. Click Open.

Using the Tag Library

Once the Tag Database has been created, individual objects can use the Library to assign a Tag to the object,
referenced to the PLC register address.
1. On addressable objects, once the Tag Database has been created, a User-defined tag checkbox
is available. This box is not available if no tags have been configured in the Database Library.

2. Check User-defined tag checkbox. The Device Type list will be filled with a list of available
tags. Objects addressable as Register-type objects will display Tags configured as Word;
Objects addressable as Bit-type objects will display Tags configured as Bit.

3. Select the desired Tag from the Device Type list to address the Object to the referenced
Register Address.

Creating the Label Library

The Label library is a database of text Labels, for use with objects utilizing text labels descriptive of their status or
condition. Each label can consist of up to 256 unique text strings (representing the maximum number of states
available per object), displayable in up to eight separate languages.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
167 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

To create a label text database library

1. From the Library menu, click Label..., or click the call-up label library manager icon from the
standard toolbar. The Label Library dialog box appears.

2. Create a label by opening the Label Library as detailed above and Clicking the New... button
to display the Label dialog.

3. Enter the Title (Name) for the label, and how many states the new label requires. For example,
a label Titled “Start” requiring 2 states, to represent separate conditions, where condition one
status is “START”, condition two is “STOP”.
4. Click the OK button, and the new label is added to the database. The Name will appear in a
selectable listing of available Labels for use with objects that support text field labeling.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating and Using Databases and Languages 168

5. The new label is still selected. Click the Settings… button to display the Label Content
Setting dialog. In the State No. list pull-down box, select the state that the text is representing.

6. In each Language box, as needed, enter the text representing that state in each language.
7. If further text labeling is required to represent conditions or status in additional states, while
still in the Settings... mode for Label Content Setting, select the state requiring text labeling.
Enter the text in the Language boxes as above.
š There is no inter-language conversion or translation capability. Entries must be made
using the correct wording for the language designated, to display as entered.

8. Continue to add state descriptive text labeling as required.

9. When all text has been entered for all states desired, Click OK. The Label is now contained in
the Label Library and displayed when the Library is opened. View text labels for the various
states of each label in the Library by selecting the State to display in the pull down box.
10. Once a label text has been created and you wish to change the number of states, you may do
so by double clicking on the desired label text. On the Label Content Setting dialog box,
click the Change No of States...button, and then enter the No. of states desired for the label.

Setting Different Fonts for Different Languages

If you would like to use different fonts for different languages, for instances, if the language you are using requires
special characters or unicode fonts, you can select a different font for each language using the label library.
4 To set a different font for each language
1. Select Library-Label or select the Label Library Manager icon from the standard toolbar.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
169 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. The Label Library dialog appears. Select the Font tab.

3. Select the font for each language from the drop down menu. Note that the fonts must be
available to you in your copy of Windows.
4. Click OK.

Importing and Exporting the Label Library

This feature allows you to save the labels from the label library into a .lbl file format. Once saved, the file can be
loaded into another project.
4To save the label library:
1. Click on Save Label File... The open dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data.
3. Click Open.
4To load the label library from an existing .lbl file:
1. Click Load Label File... The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse for the lbl file that contains the labels.
3. Click Open.
š The .lbl file format can not be edited.
The label library can also be imported and exported using a comma-separated variable (.csv) file format. This
format is very useful if you need to make several changes to the database. When creating a new project, it is easier
and faster to create and edit tags as .csv files.
4To export the label library:
1. Click Export CSV File… The Open dialog box appears.
2. Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data.
3. Click Open.
4To import the label library:
1. Click Import CSV File… The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse for the CSV file that contains the labels.
3. Click Open.

Using the Label Library

Once entries have been made to the Label Library, they can be used with any object that supports text field labeling.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Creating and Using Databases and Languages 170

1. Select an object that supports text field labeling as required. On the Label tab for the object’s
Attributes, check the Use Label Library checkbox. The Label Index list will be enabled,
containing all of the labels in the database.

2. Select the applicable label from the label tag drop down menu. The label will display on the
object, representative for states and languages as entered in the Label Library dialog.
3. Once created with Labels assigned, objects can be viewed displaying the various text labeling
in each of the states detailed, in each of the languages utilized. To view, on EasyBuilder’s
Standard Toolbar, select the state and language for objects displayed on the window. The
object’s text labeling display will change according to the state and language selected for
viewing.
4. To use the Multi-Language features of the Label Library to display object labels in languages
other than the default language (Language 0), the function must be enabled. Enable the
Multi-Language capability as detailed below.

Using Languages with the Label Library

The Silver Series supports up to eight languages for use with the Label Library text labeling. In order to use the
Multi-Language features, a label configured in multiple languages must be created and stored in the Label Library,
as detailed above. The language displayed is selected through Internal Local Word Control, LW9134.
1. Text Labels in any of up to eight languages can be displayed, as configured in the Label
Library. In LW9134, a Value of 0 enables Language 1 as configured in the Label Library, a
Value of 1 enables Language 2, a Value of 2 enables Language 3, and a Value of 3 enables
Language 4, etc.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
171 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. The appropriate value must be written to LW9134 to enable a designated language to display.
For example, a series of set word objects writing value to LW9134 could be placed on a setup
screen. Each set word might be labeled with the Language to be enabled, and the appropriate
value addressed to LW9134. If Set Word #0 enables English and English is the configured
Language 0 in the Label Library, pressing the English Set Word object writing a 0 to
LW9134 will enable label text display in English. If Set Word #1 enables French and French
is the configured Language 1 in the Label Library, pressing the French Set Word object
writing a 1 to LW9134 will enable text display in French. Continue for all Languages
configured in the Label Library.

š LW9134 is the System Tag Language Mode.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphic Objects 172

Chapter 10 - Representing Data with Graphics Objects

EasyBuilder includes several active graphics objects or ‘parts’ which are used to represent data that is stored in the
PLC or internal memory of the OIT. The data represented can be single bit coils, 16-bit, 32-bit, or 64-bit registers.
The data can be represented as numbers, ASCII characters, or as graphic shapes or bitmaps. This chapter focuses on
only parts that perform relatively simple functions. More complex parts used for alarms, trending, etc. will be
reserved for later chapters.

General Properties of Objects

Many of the objects in EZware-5000 share several common elements that are described in more detail in this
section.

When you create a new object, a popup dialog box always appears that is used to assign the particular attributes to
that object.

For example, below is the attribute box that appears when a new Word Lamp object is created:

Most of the objects have four tabs: General, Shape, Label, and Profile.

Under the General Tab

Description:

This is a text box that allows the programmer to add more details about this particular object. Please note that
information put into this box is not downloaded into the OIT.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
173 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Read Address or Write Address frame:

This is used to assign a PLC or internal HMI memory address to the object. Included in this category are the
following bulleted items:

· PLC name: select the target communications driver (port) Note: In EasyBuilder-5000, go to Edit…System
Parameters…Device tab to assign a communications driver to a physical serial or Ethernet port on the OIT.

· Device type: select the target PLC memory area. Note: For more information on options and ranges, consult the
appropriate Controller Information Sheet documentation that is included with the EZware-5000 software and
available for download from the Maple Systems website.

· Address: enter the specific PLC memory address.

· System tag: this appears if you have selected Local HMI for PLC name. System tags are internal OIT memory
addresses that are reserved for specific function. Please read the next section in this chapter for more information.

· User-defined tag: this appears if you have created any tags in the Tag Library and you have selected an alternate
communications driver (not Local HMI) for PLC name. After you have checked User-defined tags, the tags appear
in the Device Type drop-down box. Note: for more information on the Tag Library feature, see Chapter 9: Creating
and Using Databases and Languages.

· Index Register: this optional feature creates a pointer value using internal OIT Index Registers. This is useful if
you wish to dynamically (during OIT runtime) change the target PLC address without modifying the graphics object
and downloading a new project into the OIT. Note: for more information on the Indexing feature, see Chapter 10:
Using Index Registers.

· Data format: this field determines how the OIT will interpret the data it reads from the PLC register. Options are
16-bit BCD, 32-bit BCD, 16-bit Unsigned, 16-bit Signed, 32-bit Unsigned, 32-bit Signed, and 32-bit Float.

Macro frame:

Available on the Set Bit, Toggle Switch or PLC Control object, this feature activates a pre-defined Macro. For more
information on macros, see Chapter 15 – Macros.

· Execute macro: check to enable activation of a macro when object is pressed.

· Macro: Select the predefined macro from the drop-down list box. Note: to create a new macro, click
Tools…Macro in the standard toolbar of EasyBuilder-5000.

Notification frame:

Available on the Set Word, Slider, Numeric Input, ASCII Input, and Function Key objects, this feature can be used
to ‘notify’ the PLC or other device (such as another OIT) that the object has been pressed by the operator. This can
be used to simultaneously start other functions or routines in the PLC or to simply ‘warn’ the PLC or OIT that an
action is about to occur.

· Enable – check to enable this feature

o Set ON or Set OFF - select which condition is performed by the object on the Notification bit.
o Before writing or After writing – select when notification occurs before predefined action of the object is
processed or after.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphic Objects 174

The Security tab

Many objects that allow the operator to write values to the PLC (i.e. Set Bit, Set Word, Toggle Switch, Option List
Switch, Slider, Multi-State Switch, Numeric Input, ASCII Input, Function Key, Data Transfer (Trigger-Based), and
Backup) have additional security features that can be used to ensure that the operator is allowed to write to the PLC
only when specific conditions have been met or a password entered.
These features are enabled on the Security tab:

Safety Control frame:

Use this feature to ensure that the object was not accidentally pressed by the user.

· Min. press time (sec): Range is 0 to 100 seconds. If used, the operator must press and hold down the target object
(i.e. button) for the specified time period before the action is processed. For example, if the object is a Set Bit
configured to set (turn ON) a PLC coil when pressed and Minimum press time is set to 3 seconds, the operator must
press and hold down the Set Bit button for three seconds before the OIT sends a command to set the PLC bit.

· Display confirmation request: if enabled, this feature will display a popup dialog box on the OIT screen:

When the dialog box pops up, the operator presses the ‘Yes’ button to process the predefined action.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
175 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Interlock frame:

This feature allows an ‘interlock’ to be used. An interlock is typically a bit in the PLC that must be set or
‘activated’ before the object can perform its predefined action.

· Use interlock function checkbox: check to enable this feature

· Hide when disabled checkbox: use this option if you want the object to be invisible when the interlock is
disabled.

· Enable when Bit is ON, Enable when Bit is OFF: select which condition of the interlock bit activates the object.

User restriction frame:

This feature is used in conjunction with the Security tab under Edit…System Parameters to require that a password
be entered by the operator before the predefined action of the object is processed. For more information on using
the Password Security feature, see Chapter 6: Using EZware-5000 General Settings…Security section.

· Object class: there are six ‘classes’ or security levels- Class A thru Class F. Select the class level that the HMI
must be set to before allowing the object to be processed.

· Disable protection permanently after initial activation: if enabled, the OIT will no longer check the current
security level after the initial activation.

· Display warning message if access denied: displays a warning message, alerting the operator that object is
password-restricted. If not enabled, the action is simply not processed.

· Make invisible while protected: if enabled, the object remains invisible until the proper security level is
activated.

Sound frame:

This feature is available only for OIT models that support an audio out jack. The specified sound is played through
the amplified speaker attached to the OIT whenever the object is pressed.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphic Objects 176

Shape tab:

This is used to assign a graphic picture(s) to the object that represents the data from the PLC. The picture can be a
simple button key, lamp, or other object. The pictures are stored in graphics libraries of which there are two types:
Shape libraries are vector-based graphics pictures and Picture libraries are pixel-based (BMP, JPG, or GIF)
graphics. EZware-5000 includes many pre-defined libraries or you can create additional libraries of objects (see
Chapter 8: Creating Graphics Objects for more information). Below is an example of the shape tab for a Word
Lamp object:

Shape frame:

The Shape frame is used to assign a Shape Library graphic to the object. Click Use shape to select. The following
features are found in the shape frame:

· Shape Library… button – Click on this button to select a particular shape from one of the Shape Libraries.

· Inner checkbox: this appears when using the System Frame, System Button, or System Lamp libraries. When
checked, it allows you to change the inner color of the shape selected. Use the adjacent drop down box to select the
color.

· Frame checkbox : same as the Inner checkbox, except that this controls the color of the outside frame of the
shape selected.

· Interior pattern: As with the Inner and Frame checkboxes, the Interior pattern is only available when the Shape
Library selected is System Frame, System Button, or System Lamp. Click the Pattern Style button to select a pattern
for the inner color of the shape selected. Use the color drop-down box to select the secondary color used for the
pattern.
· Duplicate these attributes to every state: Click this button to copy the colors selected to every state of the
selected System shape.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
177 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Picture frame:

Used to assign a Picture Library graphic to the object. Click Use picture to select

· Picture Library… button – Click on this button to select a particular picture from one of the Picture Libraries.

Preview frame:

Used to quickly check how the selected graphic looks for each state of the object.

· 0 thru 4 buttons: these are ‘quick buttons’ that, when pressed, show the graphic that is configured to represent that
particular state of the object.

· State: If more than five states are available for this object, use this drop-down box to view the graphic that
represents each state.

· Picture: displays the name of the particular picture selected from one of the Picture Libraries.

· Type: displays type of picture (BMP, GIF, or JPG) used

· Size: displays size of picture in pixels

· Background: if the background color matches the color of the picture, you can use this drop-down box to change
the background color, making it easier to view the graphic used.

Label tab:

The label tab can be used to assign a text label to each state of the selected object. For example, a push on/off button
might have ‘OFF’ for the label assigned to State 0 and ‘ON’ assigned to State 1. You can assign labels directly to
the object or you can create a library of labels for multiple objects using the Label Library feature (for more
information on Label Libraries, see Chapter 9: Creating and Using Databases and Languages). Below is an example
of the label tab for a Word Lamp object:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphic Objects 178

Top frame:

· Use label: click to enable the label feature

· Use label library: clicking this checkbox allows you to select a label tag from the label library. Note: this feature
is not available until you first create label tags in the Label Library.

oLabel tag: Select from the drop-down box which label tag you wish to use.

oLabel Library… button: click to go to the Label Library to add/edit tags.

§Language: this appears if you are using the Label Library. Allows you to see the text for that
particular language and change the font size but you cannot edit this from this tab- you must go to the
Label Library. Note: for more information on using Languages, see Chapter 9: Creating and Using
Databases and Languages

· State: use this drop-down box or the buttons adjacent to see and adjust the parameters for the text for that
particular state.

Attribute frame:

· Font: select type of font

· Color: select color for text

· Size: select font size

· Align: this is how the text will align in relation to the size of the object. Options are left, center, or right text
alignment.

· Blink: blinks the text. Options are none, 1 second, and 0.5 seconds.

· Italic: to show text in italics. Note: Although selectable, this option is not available for every font.

· Underline: to show text in underline. Note: Although selectable, this option is not available for every font.

· Duplicate these attributes to

o Every state button: When clicked, EZware-5000 will automatically copy the attributes to every state.

o Every language button: copies attributes to every language. Note: this button is only available when a label
tag is used.

o All: copies for all states and all languages. Note: only available when label tag is used

Movement frame:

· Direction: a special effect that allows you to create a label that will scroll across the object in the direction
selected: Left, Right, Up, or Down.

o Speed: determines the relative scrolling speed (slowest setting on the left)

o Continuous: if checked, the text will repeat itself continuously

1010-1007W, Rev 06
179 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Content frame:

· Text box: this is the area in which the text is entered. If the Label Library feature is used, the text for the label
used is displayed here but cannot be edited (go into the Label Library to edit the text).

· Tracking: After you have placed the object on screen, you can see how the text is positioned on the object, as in
this example:

If you click twice on the object, you can highlight the text label and position it anywhere on the object that you see
fit:

The Tracking feature, if checked, will automatically move the text labels assigned to the other states to the same
position as the current state text label you have selected:

Duplicate this label to every state button: When clicked, the

EZware-5000 software will copy the text in the current state to every
other state. Note: Not available when using Label Library feature.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphic Objects 180

Profile tab:

The profile tab only appears after the object has been created. It can be used to change the location of the object on
the screen or the size.

Position frame:

use these settings to adjust the location of the object on the OIT screen (with reference to the upper left corner of the
object). Note that you can also simply click and drag the object to a new location as well.

· Pinned: when checked, this feature prevents the programmer from accidentally moving the object on the OIT
screen using the ‘click and drag’ feature of the mouse.

· X: the horizontal coordinate of the object

· Y: the vertical coordinate of the object

Size frame:

use to adjust the height and width of the object (in pixels). Note that you can also resize the object by clicking once
on the object. This will display eight perimeter squares which you can then click and drag to resize the object.

· Width: total width of the object

· Height: total height of the object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
181 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 02
Representing Data with Graphic Objects 182

Using Index Registers

The Index Register feature is an option available when configuring most graphics objects (i.e. Bit Lamp, Bar Graph,
Numeric Input objects). An index register allows you to dynamically (during OIT runtime) change the target PLC
address that is read or written to by the graphics object. You don’t have to reedit the OIT project and download a
new project into the unit. This feature is useful in situations where multiple data registers must be read/written to by
the OIT and you want to minimize the number of graphic objects displayed on the OIT screen. With an index
register, one graphics object can be used to read or write to multiple PLC registers.
The EZware-5000 software has 32 index registers available. Each index register uses an internal memory address of
the OIT:

Note: the first 16 index registers (INDEX 0-15) use 16-bit registers with an upper limit range of 65535, the second
16 index registers (INDEX 16-31) use 32-bit registers with an upper limit range of 4,294,967,295.

How to configure a graphics object using an index register

In this example, let’s configure a Numeric Input object using the Index Register feature:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
183 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

The target PLC address is MODBUS RTU 4x100 (40001). The index register selected is INDEX 0 (LW9200,
16-bit). If the index register feature were not used, then the OIT would simply read the contents of PLC register
40001 and display the value.

Since the index register feature is enabled, the OIT will first read the value located in INDEX 0 (LW9200) and then
add this value to the PLC register 40001. For example, if the value read in INDEX 0 is 5, then the OIT will read
PLC register 40006 {40001 [PLC Address] + 5 [INDEX0] = 40006}. You can then create another Numeric Input
object (Set Word, Multi-State Switch, or Option List) that is used to change the value in INDEX0.

1010-1007W, Rev 02
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 184

Using Internal Data Memory of OIT

The Silver Series contains internal data memory, which can be used to store information that either must be sent to
or received from the PLC. The OIT has two types of Internal Data Registers; Local and Recipe.
When using local registers, Local Word and Local Bit, the OIT retains the data stored for as long as the OIT is
operating. Once power is removed, all data stored inside the OIT is lost.
When using Recipe registers, Recipe Word and Recipe Bit, the data is stored in RAM, but is written to non-volatile
EEPROM every five minutes .

The following chart shows the memory available in the OIT

Reserved Local Bits /System Tags:

Address Function Notes

Bits are set ON at startup, but can be reset and used
LB-9000 initialized as ON
as needed.
Bits are set ON at startup, but can be reset and used
LB-9001 initialized as ON
as needed.
LB-9002 initialized as ON
LB-9003 initialized as ON
LB-9004 initialized as ON
LB-9005 initialized as ON
LB-9006 initialized as ON
LB-9007 initialized as ON
LB-9008 initialized as ON
LB-9009 initialized as ON
LB-9010 recipe download indicator ON during recipe download
LB-9011 recipe upload indicator ON during recipe upload
LB-9012 recipe download/upload indicator ON during recipe download or upload
LB-9013 FS window control[hide(ON)/show(OFF)] Controls ONLY the Fast Select Window
LB-9014 FS button control[hide(ON)/show(OFF)] Controls ONLY the Fast Select button
FS window/button
LB-9015 Controls BOTH
control[hide(ON)/show(OFF)]
disable write-back in PLC control’s
LB-9017 ON to disable screen-number writeback
[change window]
LB-9018 disable/enable mouse cursor ON=cursor disabled
LB-9019 disable/enable buzzer ON=buzzer enabled
LB-9021 reset current event log (set ON)
LB-9022 delete the oldest event log file (set ON)
LB-9023 delete all event log files (set ON)
LB-9024 refresh event log information (set ON)
delete the oldest data sampling file (set
LB-9025
ON)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
185 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

LB-9026 delete all data sampling files (set ON)

LB-9027 refresh data sampling information (set ON)
LB-9028 reset all recipe data (set ON)
LB-9029 Save all recipe data to machine (set ON)
LB-9030 Update COM1 comm. parameters ON=update
LB-9031 Update COM2 comm. parameters ON=update
LB-9032 Update COM3 comm. parameters ON=update
LB-9033 Not used
LB-9034 Save Event/Data log to HMI ON=save
LB-9035 HMI memory below limit ON=alarm
LB-9036 CF memory below limit ON=alarm
LB-9037 USB1 memory below limit ON=alarm
LB-9038 USB2 memory below limit ON=alarm
LB-9039 backup in progress ON
LB-9040 backlight up (set ON) Backlight brighter
LB-9041 backlight down (set ON) Backlight dimmer
LB-9042 acknowledge all events Set ON
LB-9043 unacknowledged events exist Set by the OIT
LB-9050 change security to level 0 (set ON)
LB-9051 change security to level 1 (set ON)
LB-9052 change security to level 2 (set ON)
LB-9053 change security to level 3 (set ON)
LB-9054 change security to level 4 (set ON)
LB-9055 change security to level 5 (set ON)
LB-9060 password error ON when an invalid password has been entered
LB-9061 update password (set ON)
set ON before writing to a time or counter in a Toshiba
LB-9070 Toshiba Timer/Counter write control
PLC
remote HMI 1 status (set on to retry
LB-9100 OFF when remote OIT is offline
connection)
remote HMI 2 status (set on to retry
LB-9101
connection)
remote HMI 3 status (set on to retry
LB-9102
connection)
remote HMI 4 status (set on to retry
LB-9103
connection)
remote HMI 5 status (set on to retry
LB-9104
connection)
remote HMI 6 status (set on to retry
LB-9105
connection)
remote HMI 7 status (set on to retry
LB-9106
connection)
remote HMI 8 status (set on to retry
LB-9107
connection)
Auto connection for PLC 1 (COM1) (when
LB-9150 ON to automatically restart communication
ON)
Auto connection for PLC 2 (COM2) (when
LB-9151
ON)
Auto connection for PLC 3 (COM3) (when
LB-9152
ON)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 186

Auto connection for PLC 4 (ethernet)

LB-9153
(when ON)
Auto connection for PLC 5 (ethernet)
LB-9154
(when ON)
Auto connection for PLC 6 (ethernet)
LB-9155
(when ON)
Auto connection for PLC 7 (ethernet)
LB-9156
(when ON)
Auto connection for PLC 8 (ethernet)
LB-9157
(when ON)
Auto connection for PLC 9 (ethernet)
LB-9158
(when ON)
PLC 1 status (SN0, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9200 Automatically resets when comm fails
connection
PLC 1 status (SN1, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9201
connection
PLC 1 status (SN2, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9202
connection
PLC 1 status (SN3, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9203
connection
PLC 1 status (SN4, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9204
connection
PLC 1 status (SN5, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9205
connection
PLC 1 status (SN6, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9206
connection
PLC 1 status (SN7, COM1), set on to retry
LB-9207
connection
PLC 2 status (SN0, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9500
connection
PLC 2 status (SN1, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9501
connection
PLC 2 status (SN2, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9502
connection
PLC 2 status (SN3, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9503
connection
PLC 2 status (SN4, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9504
connection
PLC 2 status (SN5, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9505
connection
PLC 2 status (SN6, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9506
connection
PLC 2 status (SN7, COM2), set on to retry
LB-9507
connection
PLC 3 status (SN0, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9800
connection
PLC 3 status (SN1, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9801
connection
PLC 3 status (SN2, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9802
connection
PLC 3 status (SN3, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9803
connection
PLC 3 status (SN4, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9804
connection
PLC 3 status (SN5, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9805
connection

1010-1007W, Rev 06
187 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

PLC 3 status (SN6, COM3), set on to retry

LB-9806
connection
PLC 3 status (SN7, COM3), set on to retry
LB-9807
connection
PLC 4 status (ethernet), set on to retry
LB-10100
connection
PLC 5 status (ethernet), set on to retry
LB-10400
connection
PLC 6 status (ethernet), set on to retry
LB-10700
connection
PLC 7 status (ethernet), set on to retry
LB-11100
connection
PLC 8 status (ethernet), set on to retry
LB-11300
connection
PLC 9 status (ethernet), set on to retry
LB-11600
connection

Reserved Local Word (LW) / System Tags Table

Address Function Notes

LW-9002 (32bit-float) input high limit Format is float regardless.
LW-9004 (32bit-float) input low limit This bit is set when a recipe is downloading to the PLC
LW-9006 (16bit-uns) number of remote HMIs connected
LW-9010 (16bit-BCD) local second OIT real-time clock data in BCD format
LW-9011 (16bit-BCD) local minute
LW-9012 (16bit-BCD local hour
LW-9013 (16bit-BCD) local day
LW-9014 (16bit-BCD) local month
LW-9015 (16bit-BCD) local year
LW-9016 (16bit-BCD) local week
LW-9017 (16bit) local second OIT real-time clock data in int format
LW-9018 (16bit) local minute
LW-9019 (16bit) local hour
LW-9020 (16bit) local day
LW-9021 (16bit) local month
LW-9022 (16bit) local year
LW-9023 (16bit) local week
LW-9025 (16bit) CPU loading % 0-100
LW-9030 (32bit) system time (unit 0.1 second)
LW-9040 (16bit) backlight index Backlight brightness level
LW-9050 (16bit) current base window ID
LW-9060 (16bit) no. of event log files
LW-9061 (32bit) size of event log files
LW-9063 (16bit) no. of data sampling files
LW-9064 (32bit) size of data sampling files
number of KBytes of free space before
LW-9070 (16bit)
warning is triggered
LW-9071 (16bit) reserved number of KBytes of free space
LW-9072 (32bit) current free HMI memory (KBytes)
LW-9074 (32bit) current free CF memory (KBytes)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 188

LW-9076 (32bit) current free USB1 memory (KBytes)

LW-9078 (32bit) current free USB2 memory (KBytes)
LW-9100 (16bit) project name (16 words)
LW-9116 (32bit) project size in bytes
LW-9118 (32bit) project size in K bytes
LW-9120 (32bit) compiler version
LW-9122 (16bit) project compiled date [year]
LW-9123 (16bit) project compiled date [month]
LW-9124 (16bit) project compiled date [day]
LW-9125 (16bit) ethernet gateway 0 (machine used only)l
LW-9126 (16bit) ethernet gateway 1 (machine used only)
LW-9127 (16bit) ethernet gateway 2 (machine used only)
LW-9128 (16bit) ethernet gateway 3 (machine used only)
LW-9129 (16bit) ethernet IP 0 (machine used only)
LW-1930 (16bit) ethernet IP 1 (machine used only)
LW-1931 (16bit) ethernet IP 2 (machine used only)
LW-1932 (16bit) ethernet IP 3 (machine used only)
LW-9133 (16bit) ethernet port no.
LW-9134 (16bit) language mode
LW-9150 (32 words) keyboard’s input data (ASCII)
LW-9200 (16bit) address index 0
LW-9201 (16bit) address index 1
LW-9202 (16bit) address index 2
LW-9203 (16bit) address index 3
LW-9204 (16bit) address index 4
LW-9205 (16bit) address index 5
LW-9206 (16bit) address index 6
LW-9207 (16bit) address index 7
LW-9208 (16bit) address index 8
LW-9209 (16bit) address index 9
LW-9210 (16bit) address index 10
LW-9211 (16bit) address index 11
LW-9212 (16bit) address index 12
LW-9213 (16bit) address index 13
LW-9214 (16bit) address index 14
LW-9215 (16bit) address index 15
LW-9219 (16bit) user no. (user 1 ~ user 3)
LW-9220 (32bit) password
LW-9222 (16bit) classes available to current user Bit0=class A; Bit5=class F
LW-9230 (32bit) address index 16
LW-9232 (32bit) address index 17
LW-9234 (32bit) address index 18
LW-9236 (32bit) address index 19
LW-9238 (32bit) address index 20
LW-9240 (32bit) address index 21
LW-9242 (32bit) address index 22

1010-1007W, Rev 06
189 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

LW-9244 (32bit) address index 23

LW-9246 (32bit) address index 24
LW-9248 (32bit) address index 25
LW-9250 (32bit) address index 26
LW-9252 (32bit) address index 27
LW-9254 (32bit) address index 28
LW-9256 (32bit) address index 29
LW-9258 (32bit) address index 30
LW-9260 (32bit) address index 31
LW-9300 (16bit) driver ID for local PLC 1
LW-9301 (16bit) driver ID for local PLC 2
LW-9302 (16bit) driver ID for local PLC 3
LW-9303 (16bit) driver ID for local PLC 4
LW-9350 (16bit) pending command no. in local HMI
LW-9351 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 1 (COM 1)
LW-9352 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 2 (COM 2)
LW-9353 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 3 (COM 3)
LW-9354 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 4 (ethernet)
LW-9355 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 5 (ethernet)
LW-9356 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 6 (ethernet)
LW-9357 (16bit) pending command no. in PLC 7 (ethernet)
LW-9400 (16bit) error code for PLC 0
LW-9401 (16bit) error code for PLC 1
LW-9402 (16bit) error code for PLC 2
LW-9403 (16bit) error code for PLC 3
LW-9404 (16bit) error code for PLC 4
LW-9405 (16bit) error code for PLC 5
LW-9406 (16bit) error code for PLC 6
LW-9407 (16bit) error code for PLC 7
LW-9500 (32bit) user 1’s password (level 1)
LW-9502 (32bit) user 1’s password (level 2)
LW-9504 (32bit) user 1’s password (level 3)
LW-9506 (32bit) user 1’s password (level 4)
LW-9508 (32bit) user 1’s password (level 5)
LW-9510 (32bit) user 1’s password (level 6)
LW-9512 (32bit) user 2’s password (level 1)
LW-9514 (32bit) user 2’s password (level 2)
LW-9516 (32bit) user 2’s password (level 3)
LW-9518 (32bit) user 2’s password (level 4)
LW-9520 (32bit) user 2’s password (level 5)
LW-9522 (32bit) user 2’s password (level 6)
LW-9540 (16bit) reserved for caps lock
LW-9541 (16bit) MODBUS slave station number for COM1
LW-9542 (16bit) MODBUS slave station number for COM2
LW-9543 (16bit) MODBUS slave station number for COM3

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 190

MODBUS slave station number for

LW-9544 (16bit)
Ethernet
LW-9550 (16bit) COM1 Mode 0=RS232; 1=RS485 2W, 2=RS485 4W
0=4800; 1=9600; 2=19200; 3=38400; 4=57600;
LW-9551 (16bit) COM1 Baud
5=115200
LW-9552 (16bit) COM1 Data bits 7=7 data bits; 8=8 data bits
LW-9553 (16bit) COM1 Parity 0=none; 1=even; 2=odd
LW-9554 (16bit) COM1 Stop bits 1=1 stop bit; 2=2 stop bits
LW-9555 Not used
LW-9556 (16bit) COM2 Baud
LW-9557 (16bit) COM2 Data bits
LW-9558 (16bit) COM2 Parity
LW-9559 (16bit) COM2 Stop bits
LW-9560 (16bit) COM3 mode
LW-9561 (16bit) COM3 Baud
LW-9562 (16bit) COM3 Data bits
LW-9563 (16bit) COM3 Parity
LW-9564 (16bit) COM3 Stop bits
LW-9600 (16bit) PLC4, IP0 Format IP0.IP1.IP2.IP3
LW-9601 (16bit) PLC4, IP1
LW-9602 (16bit) PLC4, IP2
LW-9603 (16bit) PLC4, IP3
LW-9604 (16bit) PLC4, IP Port
LW-9605 (16bit) PLC5, IP0
LW-9606 (16bit) PLC5, IP1
LW-9607 (16bit) PLC5, IP2
LW-9608 (16bit) PLC5, IP3
LW-9609 (16bit) PLC5, IP Port
LW-9610 (16bit) PLC6, IP0
LW-9611 (16bit) PLC6, IP1
LW-9612 (16bit) PLC6, IP2
LW-9613 (16bit) PLC6, IP3
LW-9614 (16bit) PLC6, IP Port
LW-9615 (16bit) PLC7, IP0
LW-9616 (16bit) PLC7, IP1
LW-9617 (16bit) PLC7, IP2
LW-9618 (16bit) PLC7, IP3
LW-9619 (16bit) PLC7, IP Port
LW-9620 (16bit) PLC8, IP0
LW-9621 (16bit) PLC8, IP1
LW-9622 (16bit) PLC8, IP2
LW-9623 (16bit) PLC8, IP3
LW-9624 (16bit) PLC8, IP Port
LW-9625 (16bit) PLC9, IP0
LW-9626 (16bit) PLC9, IP1
LW-9627 (16bit) PLC9, IP2
LW-9628 (16bit) PLC9, IP3

1010-1007, Rev 06
191 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

LW-9629 (16bit) PLC9, IP Port

LW-9770 (16bit) remote printer server IP0 format: IP0.IP1.IP2.IP3
LW-9771 (16bit) remote printer server IP1
LW-9772 (16bit) remote printer server IP2
LW-9773 (16bit) remote printer server IP3
LW-9774 (6 words) remote printer server password
LW-9800 (16bit) remote HMI #1 IP0 format: IP0.IP1.IP2.IP3
LW-9801 (16bit) remote HMI #1 IP1
LW-9802 (16bit) remote HMI#1 IP2
LW-9803 (16bit) remote HMI#1 IP3
LW-9804 (16bit) remote HMI #1 Port
LW-9805 (16bit) remote HMI#2 IP 0
LW-9806 (16bit) remote HMI#2 IP 1
LW-9807 (16bit) remote HMI #2 IP 2
LW-9808 (16bit) remote HMI#2 IP3
LW-9809 (16bit) remote HMI #2 Port
LW-9810 (16bit) remote HMI #3 IP 0
LW-9811 (16bit) remote HMI #3 IP 1
LW-9812 (16bit) remote HMI #3 IP 2
LW-9813 (16 bit) remote HMI #3 IP 3
LW-9814 (16bit) remote HMI #3 Port
LW-9815 (16bit) remote HMI#4 IP0
LW-9816 (16bit) remote HMI #4 IP1
LW-9817 (16bit) remote HMI#4 IP2
LW-9818 (16bit) remote HMI#4 IP3
LW-9819 (16bit) remote HMI#4 Port
LW-9820 (16bit) remote HMI#5 IP 0
LW-9821 (16bit) remote HMI #5 IP1
LW-9822 (16bit) remote HMI#5 IP2
LW-9823 (16bit) remote HMI#5 IP 3
LW-9824 (16bit) remote HMI #5 Port
LW-9825 (16bit) remote HMI #6 IP 0
LW-9826 (16bit) remote HMI#6 IP1
LW-9827 (16bit) remote HMI#6 IP2
LW-9828 (16bit) remote HMI #6 IP3
LW-9829 (16bit) remote HMI #6 Port
LW-9830 (16bit) remote HMI #7 IP 0
LW-9831 (16bit) remote HMI #7 IP 1
LW-9832 (16bit) remote HMI #7 IP2
LW-9833 (16bit) remote HMI #7 IP3
LW-9834 (16bit) remote HMI #7 Port
LW-9835 (16bit) remote HMI #8 IP 0
LW-9836 (16bit) remote HMI #8 IP1
LW-9837 (16bit) remote HMI #8 IP2
LW-9838 (16bit) remote HMI #8 IP3
LW-9839 (16bit) remote HMI #8 Port

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 192

LW-9900 Reserved
LW-9901 (16bit) Pass-through source comm. port 1-3
LW-9902 (16bit) Pass-through destination comm. port 1-3

Representing PLC Coil Registers

PLC coils (or binary registers) and internal coils of the OIT are represented using three parts: the Bit Lamp Object,
the Set Bit Object, and the Toggle Switch Object. Each has a particular function that makes them unique but they
are all constructed and used in essentially the same manner.

The Bit Lamp Object

The Bit Lamp Object is used to represent the value of a PLC coil. The object continuously reads the PLC coil and
displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the On or Off state of the coil.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
193 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4 To create a Bit Lamp Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Lamp - Bit Lamp. Or click the Bit Lamp icon in the Part1
toolbar. The New Bit Lamp Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Bit Lamp part. A description is not necessary
but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the PLC Name and Device type from the drop down menu,
and specify the PLC coil or HMI internal memory address.
4. In the Blinking frame, select how you want the Bit Lamp object to operate:

Mode Description
None Displays State 0 object when clear; displays State 1 object when set.
Alternating Image on State 0 Alternates between state 0 and 1 object when clear; displays the state 1 object when set.
Alternating Image on State 1 Displays the state 1 object when clear; alternates between state 0 and 1 when set.
Blinking on State 0 Displays state 0 object when clear; blinks state 0 object when set
Blinking on State 1 Displays state 0 object when clear; blinks state 1 object when set

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 194

5. Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form

6. Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Bit Lamp object. If you need more
information on how to do this, consult Chapter 6 “Creating Graphics Objects”.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
195 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

7. Click the Label tab to display the Label form.

8. Click the Use label checkbox if you want to use a label.

9. In the Attribute box, select the desire font, font size, alignment and color. Click the
Duplicate this label to every state button if you want to use the same label for all states.
10. You can have a different label for each state of the Bit Lamp. In the State: box, enter the
state that you wish to edit, then enter the label designations for that state in the Content: box.
Do the same for other states.
11. In the Movement box, select the direction you'd like the label to move from the drop down
menu if you desire movement.
12. In the Content box, type the content of the label. If you'd like the label to duplicate to every
state, click the Duplicate this label to every state button.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 196

13. Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or ‘track’ with the
movement of one label when it is moved after the Bit Lamp object is placed onto the window.
14. Click OK. The New Bit Lamp Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder
appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper
left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location of the window.
15. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Now click on the
label again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the
part. Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but
rather enter the Bit Lamp Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The Set Bit Object

The Set Bit Object is used to write a value to a PLC coil. The touchscreen object displays the State 0 shape until
pressed. When pressed, it displays the State 1 shape and executes the function that was assigned to it.
4 To create a Set Bit Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Set Bit. Or click the Set Bit icon in the Part1 toolbar.
The New Set Bit Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Set Bit part. A description is not necessary but
does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Write address frame, select the Device type from the drop down menu and specify the
PLC coil or HMI internal memory address in the Address: field.
4. In the Attribute frame, use the drop down menu to select how you want the Set Bit object to
operate:

Set ON When touched, sets the Bit, and leaves it set.

Set OFF When touched, clears the Bit, and leaves it cleared.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
197 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Toggle When touched, toggles the current state of the Bit.

Momentary Sets the Bit when touched, clears the Bit when released.
Periodic
Toggles the Bit ON and OFF at the specified time interval.
Toggle
Set ON
When Sets the Bit when the Window containing the Object is
Window displayed.
Opens
Set OFF
When Clears the Bit when the Window containing the Object is
Window displayed.
Opens
Set ON
When Sets the Bit when the Window containing the Object is
Window closed.
Closes
Set OFF
When Clears the Bit when the Window containing the Object is
Window closed.
Closes
Set ON
When Sets the Bit when the Backlight turns on.
Backlight On
Set OFF
When Clears the Bit when the Backlight turns on.
Backlight On
Set ON At
Sets the Bit when the Backlight turns off.
Backlight Off
Set OFF At
Clears the Bit when the Backlight turns off.
Backlight Off

5. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab. Note that it is
not required to use a shape or a bitmap. In some modes such as Set ON at window open or
Periodical toggle you may prefer to place the part on the window without a shape or bitmap
tied to it.
6. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab.
7. Click OK. The Create Set Bit Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears
with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner
of the screen. Move the part to the location on the window that you want it.
8. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Now click on the
label again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the
part. Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but
rather enter the Set Bit Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The Toggle Switch Object

The Toggle Switch Object is used to represent the value of one PLC coil while able to write a value to the same or
another PLC coil. The object continuously reads one PLC coil and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that
is tagged to the On or Off state of the coil. Also the touchscreen object when pressed, executes the function that
was assigned to it.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 198

4To create a Toggle Switch Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Toggle Switch. Or click the Toggle Switch icon in
the Part1 toolbar. The New Toggle Switch Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Toggle Switch part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the PLC coil or HMI internal memory address that the part
continuously reads.
4. In the Write address frame, specify the Device type: from the drop down menu and then
select the PLC coil or HMI internal memory address that the part writes to when pressed.
5. In the Attribute frame, select how you want the Toggle Switch object to operate:

Switch Style Description

Set ON Sets a PLC coil when pressed.
Set OFF Clears a PLC coil when pressed.
Toggle Alternates between setting and clearing a PLC coil.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
199 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Momentary Sets a PLC coil when pressed; clears a PLC coil when released

6. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab
7. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab.
8. Click OK. The Create Toggle Switch Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder
appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper
left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location in the window.
9. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Now click on the
label again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the
part. Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but
rather enter the Toggle Switch Object’s Attribute dialog box.

Representing PLC Data Registers

PLC registers and internal data registers of the OIT are represented using nine parts:
• Word Lamp Object
• Set Word Object
• Multistate Switch Object
• Numeric Display Object
• Numeric Input Extend Object
• ASCII Data Object
• ASCII Input Extend Object
• Moving Shape Object
• Animation Object
They are constructed in much the same manner as the parts described in the previous section. With these parts,
however, you can represent data from 16-bit, 32-bit, or even 64-bit data registers.

The Word Lamp Object

The Word Lamp Object is used to represent the value of a PLC register. The object continuously reads the PLC
register and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the number of states defined.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 200

4To create a Word Lamp Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Lamp-Word Lamp. Or click the Word Lamp icon in the
Part1 toolbar. The Create Word Lamp Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Word Lamp part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. Mode: Sets how the object determines the state.

Value The state of the object is the value in the specified Read Address
The state of the object is determined by the first bit that is set in the
value specified by the Read Address:
00000000 state 0
00000001 state 1
LSB: 00000010 state 2
Note: This mode will 00000100 state 3
not work correctly when data 10000000 state 8
is 32-bit float
If more than one bit is set, the lowest-order bit is used:
00000011 state 1
10001000 state 4

The state of the object increments automatically at the interval

Change State by Time
specified by Time Interval. After the last state, the word lamp reverts to state 0.

4. In the Read address frame, select the Device type from the drop down menu, and then select
the PLC register address.
5. In the No. of states: box, select from 1 to 256 states. If the actual value in the PLC register is
out-of-range for the number of states specified, then no shape or bitmap is displayed.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
201 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

6. Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form.

7. Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Word Lamp object. If you need more
information on how to do this, consult Chapter 6 “Creating Graphics Objects”.
8. Click the Label tab to display the Label form..

9. Click the Use Label checkbox if you want to use a label. Click the Duplicate this label to
other states button if you want to use the same label for all states.
10. You can have a different label for each state of the Word Lamp. In the State: box, enter the
state that you wish to edit, then enter the label for that state in the Content: box. Do the same
for the other states.
11. Select the font that you want from the Font: drop down menu, and then select the font color
and font size from the appropriate drop down menus. You can select a different font, color
and size for each label state.
12. Enter how you want the label to be positioned in the Align: box. You can select a different
position for each label state.
13. Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or ‘track’ with the
movement of one label when it is moved after the Word Lamp object is placed onto the
window.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 202

14. Click OK. The Create Word Lamp Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder
appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper
left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
15. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Now click on the
label again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the
part. Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but
rather enter the Word Lamp Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The Set Word Object

The Set Word Object is used to write a value to a PLC register. The touchscreen object displays the State 0 shape
until pressed. When pressed, it displays the State 1 shape and executes the function that was assigned to it.
4To create a Set Word Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Set Word. Or click the Set Word icon in the Part1
toolbar. The New Set Word Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Set Word part. A description is not necessary
but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Write address frame, select Device type from the drop down menu, and then specify the
PLC coil or HMI internal memory address.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
203 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4. Select the data format.

5. In the Attribute frame, select how you want the Set Word object to operate:

Write Constant Value When touched, sets the Write Address to the specified value.
Each time it is touched, increments the value in the Write Address by the value specified by Inc.
Increment Value (JOG+) Value, up to the value specified by Upper Limit.
Each time it is touched, decrements the value in the Write Address by the value specified by Dec.
Decrement Value (JOG-)
Value, down to the value specified by Bottom Limit.
When touched, increments the value in the Write Address by the value specified by Inc. Value, up
Press and Hold Increment
to the value specified by Upper Limit. When held for the time specified by Jog Delay, continues to
(JOG++)
increment the value in the Write Address, at the rate specified by Jog Speed.
When touched, decrements the value in the Write Address by the value specified by Dec. Value,
Press and Hold Decrement
down to the value specified by Bottom Limit. When held for the time specified by Jog Delay,
(JOG—)
continues to decrement the value in the Write Address, at the rate specified by Jog Speed.
Increments the value in the Write Address by the value specified by Inc. Value, up to the value
Periodic JOG++
specified by Upper Limit, at the rate indicated by Time Interval.
Decrements the value in the Write Address by the value specified by Dec. Value, down to the
Automatic JOG—
value specified by Bottom Limit, at the rate indicated by Time Interval.
Similar to Periodic Jog++, except that the value begins decrementing when it reaches the Upper
Periodic Bounce
Limit. Then, the value begins incrementing again.
Starting with the value in the Low Limit box, increments the value in the specified register by 1,
until the value in the High Limit box is reached, at the rate specified by the Time Interval. When
Periodic Step Up
the High Limit is reached, the register value is reset to the Low Limit, and the incrementing
repeats.
Starting with the value in the High Limit box, decrements the value in the specified register by 1,
until the value in the Low Limit box is reached, at the rate specified by the Time Interval. When
Periodic Step Down
the Low Limit is reached, the register value is reset to the High Limit, and the decrementing
repeats.
Sets the Write Address to the value specified by Set Value when the Window containing the
Set When Window Opens
Object is displayed.
Sets the Write Address to the value specified by Set Value, when the Window containing the
Set When Window Closes
Object is closed.
Set When Backlight On Writes the specified value to the Write Address when the Backlight turns on.
Set When Backlight Off Writes the specified value to the Write Address when the Backlight turns off.

6. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab. Note that it is
not required to use a shape or a bitmap. In some modes such as Set When Window Opens or
Periodic JOG++ you may prefer to place the part on the window without a shape or bitmap
tied to it.
7. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab.
8. Click OK. The New Set Word Object dialog closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder
appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper
left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
9. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Click on the label
again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the part.
Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but rather
enter the Set Word Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The Slider Object

The slider object is used to write data to a PLC Register. It also reflects the value in the PLC register. Data is written
to the register when the slider is released. The following data formats are supported:
• 16-bit BCD
• 32-bit BCD
• 16-bit Unsigned
• 16-bit Signed
• 32-bit Unsigned

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 204

• 32-bit Signed
• 32-bit Float
4 To create a slider object:

1. From the Objects menu, select Button-Slider. Or, click the slider icon from the object
toolbar. The New Slider Object Dialog appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the slider part. A description is not necessary but
does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Write address frame, specify the Device type: from the drop down menu and then
select the PLC coil or HMI internal memory address that the part writes to when pressed.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
205 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4. Click the Outline tab:

5. In the Attribute section, select the direction that you want the slider to move. Next, set the
resolution as the amount by which the register value changes as the slider is moved. Finally,
et the high limit and low limit as the minimum and maximum values to be written to the
register. Check the coarse increment check box to allow the slider to change register by a
value larger than that specified by the Resolution setting and then select the increment by
which the register will be changed.
6. In the Moving piece section, select the color, size, and appearance of the slider’s pointer.
7. In the colors section, select the color and transparency for the frame, background and slot of
the slider.

The MultiState Switch Object

The MultiState Switch Object is used to represent the value of one 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit PLC register while
writing a 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit value to the same or another PLC register each time the object is pressed. The
object continuously reads one PLC register and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the
defined states of the register. For example, if the value read in the PLC is 0, then the MultiState Switch displays the
graphic picture or text label that is assigned to State 0. The touchscreen object when pressed, executes the function
that was assigned to it.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 206

4 To create a MultiState Switch Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Button-MultiState Switch. Or click the MultiState Switch
icon in the Part1 toolbar. The New MultiState Switch Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description box: to enter a title for the MultiState Switch part. A description is
not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.

3. Value: The state of the object is the value in the specified Read Address. Offset option, if
used, is subtracted from the value read to determine the State that is displayed. For example,
if offset is 2, Read Address is set to LW200 and the value read is 5, then the state displayed
is 3 ( 5[LW200] – 2 [Offset] = 3).

1010-1007W, Rev 06
207 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Value The state of the object is the value in the specified Read Address.
The state of the object is determined by the first bit (from right to left) that is
set in the value specified by the Read Address:

00000000 state 0
00000001 state 1
LSB:
00000010 state 2
Note: This Mode will not work correctly when the
00000100 state 3
data format is32-bit float
10000000 state 8

If more than one bit is set, the lowest-order bit is used:

00000011 state 1
10001000 state 4

4. Read Address frame: this is the target PLC address that is read by the OIT to determine
what state to display. For more information, see General Properties section at the beginning
of this chapter.
5. Write Address frame: this is the target PLC address that is written to by the OIT when the
Multi-State switch button is pressed. For more information, see General Properties section at
the beginning of this chapter.
a. Write when button is release checkbox: check this box to write to the PLC after the
Multi-State Switch has been released.
6. Attribute frame: User-defined mapping: this feature allows you to create a table that
matches each State to a unique constant number. To use this feature, check the User-defined
mapping checkbox, then click on the Set.. button:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 208

The number of states shown depends upon the number of states selected in the Attribute frame. In this example,
there are a total of five states. Click on the entry in the Value column for each State to enter a new constant value:

Note: You cannot enter a value for the last (error) state. The error state is always represented by any value that is
not represented by one of the other states.

Note: Negative values are not supported. Floating point values supported.

Also note that the values entered for each state are unique- not related to other values entered for other states.

For example: entering a value of 14 for State 2 in the example above is acceptable.

Input illegal frame: this setting determines how the Multi-State Switch will ‘react’ if the value read from the PLC
register does not exactly match any of the predefined values assigned to each state.

Remain current state: select this option if you want the Multi-State Switch to simply remain in the
current state if an invalid value is read.

Jump to error state: select this option if you want the Multi-State Switch to display the ‘error
state’ which is simply a blank (no picture or label is displayed). The Multi-State Switch will remain
blank and inoperative until a valid state value is read from the PLC.

Notification frame: this optional feature can be used to set (or clear) a target PLC bit when the Multi-State Switch
object reads a value in the PLC register that is invalid. Note: the PLC must clear this bit after notification from the
OIT.

Set ON or Set OFF: select which action the HMI takes when an error occurs.

Switch Style Option Description

Increments the PLC register by 1 each time the key is pressed. When the highest state is
JOG+ reached, the key resets to State 0.
No. of states: Range: 1 to 255
Decrements the PLC register by 1 each time the key is pressed. When the State 0 is
JOG- reached, the key resets to the highest state.
No. of states: Range: 1 to 255

1010-1007W, Rev 06
209 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Cyclical Option Description

When the value in the specified register reaches its maximum, the next touch will have no
Disable
effect on the value.
When the value in the specified register reaches its maximum, the next touch will cause
Enable
the value to reset to 0.

7. Click OK. The New MultiState Switch Object form closes and the main screen of
EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at
the upper left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
8. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Now click on the
label again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the
part. Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but
rather enter the MultiState Switch Object’s Properties dialog box.

The Numeric Display Object

The Numeric Display Object is used to display the numeric value of a PLC register. The object continuously reads
the PLC register and displays the corresponding numeric data in the format specified. The PLC register can be a
16-bit, 32-bit, or a 64-bit word.
4To create a Numeric Display Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Numeric/ASCII-Numeric Display. Or click the Numeric
Display icon in the Part1 toolbar. The New Numeric Data Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the numeric display part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu and then specify
the PLC register address that the part continuously reads.
4. Click the Numeric Format tab to display the Numeric format form.
5. In the Display attribute box, select the format type you wish to use. The options are:

Format Range Description

16-bit BCD 0 to 32,767 BCD 16-bit Binary-Coded Decimal
32-bit BCD 0 to 65,536 BCD 32-bit Binary-Coded Decimal
16-bit Hex 0 to FFFF 16-bit Hexadecimal
32-bit Hex 0 to FFFFFFFF 32-bit Hexadecimal

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 210

16-bit Binary 00… to 11… (16 bits) 16 Binary Digits

32-bit Binary 00… to 11… (32 bits) 32 Binary Digits
16-bit Unsigned 0 to 65,537 16-bit Unsigned Integer
16-bit Signed -32,768 to +32,768 16-bit Signed Integer
32-bit Unsigned 0 to 4,294,967,295 32-bit Unsigned Integer
32-bit Signed -2,147,483,647 to +2,147,483,647 32-bit Signed Integer
-9999999999.9999999999 to
32-bit Float IEEE754 Single Precision
9999999999.9999999999

6. Check the Mask box to hide the value with asterisks.

7. In the Number of Digits section, select how the data is to be represented.

Format Options Range Description

Left of Dec. Pt. 1 to 11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
16-bit BCD
Right of Dec. Pt. 0 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. 1 to 11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
32-bit BCD
Right of Dec. Pt. 0 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 4 hex digits to the left of the Decimal Point
16-bit Hex
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 8 hex digits to the left of the Decimal Point
32-bit Hex
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 16 binary digits to the left of the Decimal Point
16-bit Binary
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 32 binary digits to the left of the Decimal Point
32-bit Binary
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
16-bit Unsigned
Right of Dec. Pt. 0 to 11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
16-bit Signed
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
32-bit Unsigned
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
32-bit Signed
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
32-bit Float
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point

8. The Unsigned, Signed, and Float formats have the option of scaling the data. To display a
scaled value, check the Do Conversion box. In the Engineering Low field, enter the lowest
value that the OIT is to display. In the Engineering High field, enter the highest value that the
OIT is to display. The conversion will also use the Low and High limits specified in the
Limits section.
9. In the Limits section, first select if the Input Low and High values will be entered directly, or
read from a series of PLC registers. If read from a register, the Low Limit is read from the
specified register, and the High Limit is read from the next consecutive register. In either
case, the valid ranges are listed below.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
211 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Format Options Range

Low Limit 0
16-bit BCD
High Limit 65,535
Low Limit 0
32-bit BCD
High Limit 4,294,967,295
Low Limit 0
16-bit Hex
High Limit 65,535
Low Limit 0
32-bit Hex
High Limit 4,294,967,295

16-bit Low Limit 0

Binary High Limit 65,535

32-bit Low Limit 0

Binary High Limit 4,294,967,295

16-bit Low Limit 0

Unsigned High Limit 65535

16-bit Low Limit -32,768

Signed High Limit 32,768

32-bit Low Limit 0

Unsigned High Limit 4,294,967,295
-2,147,483,64
Low Limit
32-bit 7
Signed +2,147,483,64
High Limit
7
-9999999999.
Low Limit
9999999999
32-bit Float
+9999999999.
High Limit
9999999999

10. Click the Font tab to configure the font.

11. Select your Font from the drop down menu. Enter the color that you want for the digits
displayed in the color: box and then select the font size.
12. Enter how you want the digits to be positioned in the Align: box. The choices are:
• Right Adjust - aligns the number to the right margin of the part.
• Left Adjust - aligns the number to the left margin of the part.
• Leading Zero - inserts leading zeroes
13. Click OK. The Numeric Data Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears
with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner
of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
14. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can modify the attributes by double-clicking on
the part to display the Numeric Data Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The Numeric Input Object

The Numeric Input Object is used to read and write numeric values to a PLC register. The object continuously reads
the PLC register and displays the corresponding value in the format specified. The PLC register can be a 16-bit or
32-bit word. By using the keypad, the operator can enter a new value.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 212

4To create a Numeric Input Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Numeric/ASCII-Numeric Input. Or click the Numeric
Input icon in the Part1 toolbar. The New Numeric Input Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Numeric Input part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu and then specify
the PLC register address that the part continuously reads and writes to. Select the data
format.
4. In the Keyboard frame, select window that contains the keypad you will be using for data
entry from the drop-down menu, and then select the spot on the nine-dot matrix where you'd
like the keypad to popup relative to the OIT display.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
213 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

5. Click the Numeric Format tab..

6. In the Display attribute box, select the format type you wish to use. The options are:

Format Range Description

16-bit BCD 0 to 32,767 BCD 16-bit Binary-Coded Decimal
32-bit BCD 0 to 65,536 BCD 32-bit Binary-Coded Decimal
16-bit Hex 0 to FFFF 16-bit Hexadecimal
32-bit Hex 0 to FFFFFFFF 32-bit Hexadecimal
16-bit Binary 00… to 11… (16 bits) 16 Binary Digits
32-bit Binary 00… to 11… (32 bits) 32 Binary Digits
16-bit Unsigned 0 to 65,537 16-bit Unsigned Integer
16-bit Signed -32,768 to +32,768 16-bit Signed Integer
32-bit Unsigned 0 to 4,294,967,295 32-bit Unsigned Integer
32-bit Signed -2,147,483,647 to +2,147,483,647 32-bit Signed Integer
-9999999999.9999999999 to
32-bit Float IEEE754 Single Precision
9999999999.9999999999

6. Check the Mask box to hide the value with asterisks.

7. In the Number of Digits section, select how the data is to be represented.

Format Options Range Description

Left of Dec. Pt. 1 to 11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
16-bit BCD
Right of Dec. Pt. 0 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 214

Left of Dec. Pt. 1 to 11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
32-bit BCD
Right of Dec. Pt. 0 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 4 hex digits to the left of the Decimal Point
16-bit Hex
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 8 hex digits to the left of the Decimal Point
32-bit Hex
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 16 binary digits to the left of the Decimal Point
16-bit Binary
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. N/A Displays 32 binary digits to the left of the Decimal Point
32-bit Binary
Right of Dec. Pt. N/A No digits are displayed to the right of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt. 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
16-bit Unsigned
Right of Dec. Pt. 0 to 11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
16-bit Signed
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
32-bit Unsigned
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
32-bit Signed
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point
Left of Dec. Pt 1 to 11 Digits to display to the right of the Decimal Point
32-bit Float
Right of Dec. Pt. 0-11 Digits to display to the left of the Decimal Point

8. The Unsigned, Signed, and Float formats have the option of scaling the data. To display a
scaled value, check the Do Conversion box. In the Engineering Low field, enter the lowest
value that the OIT is to display. In the Engineering High field, enter the highest value that the
OIT is to display. The conversion will also use the Low and High limits specified in the
Limits section.
9. In the Limits section, first select if the Input Low and High values will be entered directly, or
read from a series of PLC registers. If read from a register, the Low Limit is read from the
specified register, and the High Limit is read from the next consecutive register. In either
case, the valid ranges are listed below.

Format Options Range

Low Limit 0
16-bit BCD
High Limit 65,535
Low Limit 0
32-bit BCD
High Limit 4,294,967,295
Low Limit 0
16-bit Hex
High Limit 65,535
Low Limit 0
32-bit Hex
High Limit 4,294,967,295
Low Limit 0
16-bit Binary
High Limit 65,535
Low Limit 0
32-bit Binary
High Limit 4,294,967,295

16-bit Low Limit 0

Unsigned High Limit 65535

16-bit Low Limit -32,768

Signed High Limit 32,768

1010-1007W, Rev 06
215 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

32-bit Low Limit 0

Unsigned High Limit 4,294,967,295
Low Limit -2,147,483,647
32-bit
Signed +2,147,483,64
High Limit
7
-9999999999.9
Low Limit
999999999
32-bit Float
+9999999999.
High Limit
9999999999

10. Click the Security tab to enable security for the numeric input object, if needed. Interlock
frame, check the Enable box if the PLC is to enable or disable the object. The object will be
enabled when the specified bit is set or clear, depending on whether the "Enable when Bit is
ON" or "Enable when Bit is OFF" option is selected. To make the object invisible when
disabled, check the Hide When Disabled checkbox. In the remaining options, select the PLC
/ Controller that controls the bit, and select the Device Type and the address. If security is
enabled, you have the option of selecting up to level 6 of security and selecting to make the
object invisible until the password has been entered.

11. Click the Shape tab to configure a shape or bitmap that is displayed behind the number.
12. Click on the Font tab to select a font.
13. Select the font you want from the Font: drop down menu. Select the desired font size and
color.
14. Enter the desired text positioning in the Align: box. The choices are:
• Right Adjust - aligns the number to the right margin of the part.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 216

• Left Adjust - aligns the number to the left margin of the part.
• Leading Zero - inserts leading zeroes
15. Click OK. The Numeric Input Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears
with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner
of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
16. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can modify the attributes by double-clicking on
the part to display the Numeric Input Object’s Attribute dialog box. You may also resize the
object by single clicking on the object and pulling the border of the object to the appropriate
size. The object’s associated text may be repositioned by clicking on the object, and then by
dragging the text to it’s new position.

The ASCII Display Object

The ASCII Display Object is used to display the character values of a series of PLC registers. The object
continuously reads the PLC registers and displays the corresponding ASCII Data in the format specified. The
ASCII Display Object can read up to 32 PLC registers to display a maximum of 32 characters.
Each 16 bit register stores two ASCII characters. The first ASCII character is stored in the eight least significant
bits of the register. The 16-bit register that you select is the starting point for the ASCII character string. The
example below illustrates how an eight character string is arranged:

4To create an ASCII Display Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Numeric/ASCII-ASCII Display. Or click the ASCII Display
icon in the Part1 toolbar. The Create ASCII Display Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the ASCII Display part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu and then specify
the PLC register address that the part continuously reads. Select No. of words: Remember, 1
word = 2 characters.
4. Click the Font tab to configure the font.
5. Click OK. The ASCII Data Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears
with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner
of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
217 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

6. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can modify the attributes by double-clicking on
the part to display the ASCII Data Object’s Attribute dialog box.

The ASCII Input Object

The ASCII Input Object is used to enter characters into a series of PLC registers. The object continuously reads the
PLC registers and displays the corresponding ASCII characters in the format specified. The ASCII Input Extend
Object can write a maximum of 32 characters to 16 contiguous PLC registers.
See the ASCII Data section for information on how the ASCII characters are actually stored in the PLC registers.
4To create a ASCII Input Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Numeric ASCII-ASCII Input.. Or click the ASCII Input
icon in the Part1 toolbar. The New ASCII Input Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the ASCII Input part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 218

3. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu and then specify
the PLC register address that the part continuously reads. Select No. of words: Remember, 1
word = 2 characters.
4. In the Notification frame, check the Enable box if the OIT is to notify the PLC when the
object has been activated. Configure whether the specified bit is to be turned on or off,
whether the bit is to be written before or after the data is written, and finally specify the PLC
Coil that the OIT is to write to.
5. In the Keyboard section, select your kepyad from the drop-down menu, and then select the
popup position relative to the OIT screen using the nine-dot matrix indicated (for instance,
clicking the middle dot will pop the keypad up in the middle of the display).
6. Click the Security tab to display the security form.

7. To enable security for the object, click the Enable checkbox and configure PLC settings from
the drop-down menu.
8. Select the level of user restriction from the Object class drop-down menu.
9. You may select to make the object invisible while protected. You may also wish to enable a
sound that plays when the protection keypad popus up. Sounds can be selected from sound
libraries.
10. Click the Shape tab to configure a shape or bitmap that is displayed behind the number.
11. Click the Font tab to configure the font.

The Moving Shape Object

The Moving Shape Object performs three functions depending upon the values in three consecutive PLC registers:
• Similar to the Word Lamp Object, the Moving Shape object continuously reads a PLC register and
displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the number of states defined.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
219 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

• the Moving Shape object continuously reads a second PLC register to determine where along an
x-axis to display the shape or bitmap.
• the Moving Shape object continuously reads a third PLC register to determine where along a y-axis
to display the shape or bitmap.
This feature allows you to create a shape or bitmap on a screen that can change the way it looks as well as where it
is located on the OIT screen depending upon the control of the PLC. This can be used to simulate a control process
such as some products moving on a conveyor system to different parts of the plant.

4To create a Moving Shape Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Moving Shape. Or click the Moving Shape icon in the Part2
toolbar. The Create Moving Shape Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Moving Shape part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu, and then specify
the starting PLC coil address that the part reads from. Select the data type. The number of
registers read depends upon the Style used.
4. In the Attribute frame, select how you want the Moving Shape object to operate:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 220

Style Option Description

Reads two 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis. The OIT places the
shape relative to the starting location. For example, if the shape is located on the
window at X=50, and Register #2 has a value of 10, the shape is placed at X=60. If
Register #2 has a value of -10, the shape is placed at X=40.
X axis only
No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
Input low: Not used
Input high: Not used
Reads two 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis. The OIT places the
shape relative to the starting location. For example, if the shape is located on the
window at Y=50, and Register #2 has a value of 10, the shape is placed at Y=60. If
Register #2 has a value of -10, the shape is placed at Y=40.
Y axis only
No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
Input low: Not used
Input high: Not used
Reads three 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis. Register #3
determines the position of the shape along the Y axis. The OIT places the shape
relative to the starting location. For example, if the shape is located on the window at
X=50, Y=10, and Register #2 has a value of 10 and Register #3 has a value of 5, the
shape is placed at X=60, Y=15. If Register #2= -10 and Register #3= -5, the shape is
X & Y axis
placed at X=40, Y=5.
No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
Input low: Not used
Input high: Not used
Reads two 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis. The OIT places the
shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position. For example, if
Input low=0, Input high=10, Scaling low=0, and Scaling high=100, then when the value
in the PLC register increases by 1, the shape moves right along the X axis by 10 pixels.
No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
X axis w/scaling
Input low: This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Input high: This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Scaling low: This is the low scaled value.
Scaling high: This is the high scaled value.
Reads two 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis. The OIT places the
shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position. For example, if
Input low=0, Input high=10, Scaling low=0, and Scaling high=100, then when the value
in the PLC register increases by 1, the shape moves down along the Y axis by 10 pixels.
No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
Y axis w/scaling
Input low: This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Input high: This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Scaling low: This is the low scaled value.
Scaling high: This is the high scaled value.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
221 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Reads two 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis. The OIT places the
shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position. For example, if
Input low=0, Input high=10, Scaling low=0, and Scaling high=100, then when the value
in the PLC register increases by 1, the shape moves left along the X axis by 10 pixels.
X axis w/reverse No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
scaling
Input low: This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Input high: This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Scaling low: This is the low scaled value.
Scaling high: This is the high scaled value.
Reads two 16-bit registers. Register #1 determines the state of the shape displayed.
Register #2 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis. The OIT places the
shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position. For example, if
Input low=0, Input high=10, Scaling low=0, and Scaling high=100, then when the value
in the PLC register increases by 1, the shape moves up along the Y axis by 10 pixels.
Y axis w/reverse No. of states: Range = 0 to 255
scaling
Input low: This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Input high: This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register
Scaling low: This is the low scaled value.
Scaling high: This is the high scaled value.

5. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab.
6. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab.
7. Click OK. The Create Moving Shape Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder
appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper
left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
8. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Click on the label
again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the part.
Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but rather
enter the Moving Shape Object’s Attribute dialog box.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 222

The Animation Object

The Animation Object is very similar to the Moving Shape Object. It also allows you to create a shape or bitmap on
a screen that can change the way it looks as well as where it is located on the OIT screen depending upon the control
of the PLC. However, the Animation Object moves along a predefined path that is determined when you create the
part. Because of this, the Animation Object requires only two registers for changing state and X/Y movement:
• the Animation object continuously reads a PLC register and displays the corresponding shape or
bitmap that is tagged to the number of states defined.
• the Animation object continuously reads a second PLC register to determine which position along
the predefined path it should be.
As shown in the following example, the part moves along a predefined track when the value in the second PLC
register is incremented:

To create an Animation Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Animation. Or click the Animation icon in the Part2 toolbar.
The mouse cursor changes from a pointer to a circle when placed over the work area of
EasyBuilder. Use the cursor to set the path that the Animation object is to take. At each
location along the path, click the mouse to place another position marker. A maximum of
255 position markers may be placed onto the window screen.
2. When you have finished placing the position markers, right click the mouse to display the part
at the first position.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
223 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

3. Double click the part. The Animation Object’s Properties dialog box appears:.

4. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Animation part. A description is not necessary
but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
5. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu and then indicate
the starting PLC coil address that the part reads from. Select the data format.
6. In the No. of states: box, select the total number of states to be displayed.
7. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab.
8. Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab.
9. Click on the Profile tab. The Profile dialog box appears.

10. The Position settings refer to the overall location of the Animation Object on the window
screen.
11. The Size settings refer to the overall size of the Animation Object.
12. The Shape rectangle size settings refer to the size of the shape or picture that you are using.
13. The Trajectory setting allows you to manipulate the position of each point along the path of
movement. Click on the points pull-down box to select the point you wish to change, then
edit the X and Y positions.
14. Click OK. The Animation Object’s Properties dialog form closes and the main screen of
EasyBuilder appears with the Animation part you just created on the screen. The shape you
selected is located at the first position on the path.
15. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the attributes by double-clicking on
the part to enter the Animation Object’s Properties dialog box.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 224

The XY Plot Object

An XY Plot Object plots one series of values against another series of values.
4 To create an XY Plot Object:

1. Select Objects - XY Plot from the EZBuilder menu or select the XY plot icon from the parts
toolbar. The New XY Plot Object dialog appears.

2. Select the General tab.

• Description: Enter the text description or name for the object.
• Direction: Specify the direction of the plot:
Right - the origin is at the lower left. The X-axis moves to the right, the
colors Y-axis moves up.
Left - the origin is at the lower right. The X-axis moves to the left, the
Y-axis moves up.
Up - the origin is at the lower left. The X-axis moves up, the Y-axis moves
to the right.
Down - the origin is at the upper left. The X-axis moves down, the Y-axis
moves to the right.
• No of channels: Specify the number of datasets to display.
• In the Control Address section, set the PLC name of the PLC to read/write. Set the Device Type
and the Control Address. The Control Address field determines how the XY Plot operates:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
225 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Trigger Value Effect

1 The current data is plotted, any existing plot data remains.
2 All plotted data is cleared.
3 The plot is cleared, then the current data is plotted.

Check the User defined tag checkbox if you wish to fill the Device list with Tag Names
instead of using the PLC's Device types. Set No. of Data Address to indicate the address
(offset from the Control Address) that contains the number of data points to plot .
• Select the channel to configure.
• In the Read Address section, select the PLC Name. Check the Separate Addresses for X and Y
Data checkbox if you wish the XY Plot to use separate sets of addresses for X and Y data. If
unchecked, all data is read from the same set of addresses. The current Read Address settings are
displayed in the Read Address box. Click Settings... to reconfigure.
• In the Limits section, check the Dynamic Limits checkbox if you wish the high and low limits to
be read from the controller register. Otherwise, specify the limits by completing the X-axis high
limit, X-axis low limit, Y-axis high limit and Y-axis low limit.

1010-1007W, Rev 05
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 226

3. Select the Display Area tab:.

• In the Profile Color section, check the Transparent checkbox if you wish the frame and
background of the XY plot to be invisible. Otherwise, select the frame and background colors.
• In the Curve section, select the channel number to configure and then set pen properties and how
the plot will display in the Maker section.
• In the Reference line section, check the Limit from PLC checkbox if checked, the low and high
limits are read from controller register. Then set PLC name, Device type and Address.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
227 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

• If you'd like reference lines on the plot, check the Reference line checkboxes and specify the
position.
4. Select the Shape tab:

• In the Shape section, , check the Use shape checkbox and then click the Shape library...button to
select a background shape from the shape library. Check the Inner checkbox to use the interior
portion of the selected shape and select the color. Check the Frame checkbox to use the frame of
the shape and select the color.
• In the Picture section, select the Use picture checkbox and then click the Picture library... button
to select a background picture. Click the Set to original dimensions checkbox to always set the
picture to its original size.
• Use the preview section to preview a part's appearance in its selected state.

5. Click OK to save settings.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 228

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
229 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 02
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 230

Data Block Display

The Data Block Display reads data points read from consecutive PLC registers based upon a triggered event then
plots them as a line graph. It is very similar to the Trend Graph object, except that data points are plotted based
upon a triggering device rather than time-based.
Each line represents a "channel" or collection of data points read simultaneously from consecutive PLC registers.
Below is an example of a simple data block display with a single channel:

In this example, data is captured from five consecutive PLC registers (LW3-7):
·LW3(200)
·LW4(400)
·LW5(800)
·LW6 (300)
·LW7(200)

This data was read from the PLC immediately after a trigger called the ‘Control Word Address’ is set to 1 (in this
example, we used LW0). The data points are plotted evenly across the X axis according to predefined settings.

NOTE: If data is captured again, it can be overlaid on the prior reading or you can erase the current plot and
replace it with a new graph:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
231 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

In the above graph the Control Word Address is set to 1 to overlay the plots.

In the above graph the Control Word Address is set to 3 to erase existing plots and trigger a new plot.

A maximum of twelve channels can be displayed. In this example, three channels are displayed:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 232

Each channel is controlled by a unique Control Word Address.

To create a Data Block Display Object:

1.From the Objects menu, click Data Block Display. Or click the Data Block Display icon in the
Object2 toolbar. The New Data Block Display dialog box appears:

2.Description: see section “General Properties” at the beginning of this chapter.

3.No. of channel: Enter the total number of channels (collection of data points depicted as a line graph) that are
displayed. Range is 1 to 12.

4.Cursor line frame: this option is used to display a vertical ‘watch’ line on the line graph. During operation, when
the user touches the Data Block display object, a cursor line appears. The OIT then reads all of the data points along
this vertical line and writes the values to predefined registers. Use the Numeric Display object to display these
registers.

a. Enable: check to enable the cursor ‘watch’ line feature.

b. Color: select the color required for the vertical cursor line
c. PLC Name, etc: use to select the target PLC register. For more information on each field, see
“General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
233 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

5.Channel: select to define the Control Address parameters for each channel.

6.Control Address frame: use to select the target PLC register.

a. PLC Name: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.

b. Device type: same as above

c. Control word address: this is the specific PLC address from the Device Type memory area. The Control
Word Address is the ‘trigger’ that is used during operation to capture the data and plot a line graph. To do this, the
operator writes the following command values to this register:

0 = No action (default) occurs.

Note: the OIT will automatically write the value of 0 after performing the specified command

1 = Plot the data points Note: use this command to overlap consecutive plots
2 = Clear the graph
3 = Clear the graph and plot new points

d. No. of data address: This is the register that the OIT uses to determine how many consecutive data points to
capture. By default, the address is Control word address+1. The maximum number of data points is 1024.

e. Data storage start: This is the starting register address that is read by the OIT to capture the data points that
are displayed as a line graph. By default, it is the Control Word Address+2. The total number of addresses read is
determined by ‘No. of data address’ setting above. If the ‘Offset to start address’ is checked, this register is read by
the OIT as an offset. The value is added to the Control Word Address to determine the first register to be read for
data points.

f. Offset to start address: enable this to change the Data Storage Start address to an Offset.

g. Index Register: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.

h. Format: Determines how the OIT will interpret the data values.Limit:

i. Limit:

i. Min: This is the minimum range of the line graph.

ii. Max: This is the maximum range to the line graph

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 234

Display Area tab: used to configure how the data appears and sampling rate:

1. Data samples: Determines how many data points or samples are displayed on a single screen. Note:
if this number is smaller than the actual number of data points collected, the scroll button feature should
be enabled.
2. Samples to scroll: Determines how much the line graph moves forward or backward
when using the scrolling buttons. Units are based upon number of data points.
3. Enable scroll switch: displays scroll buttons on the line graph if enabled.
4. Profile color frame: this determines the colors used for the background of the line graph
a. Transparent: If enabled, only the channels are displayed. This feature is useful when
overlapping on some other objects.

b. Frame: Determines the color of a thin line that encircles or frames the line graph. Note: if a
shape is used, it will overwrite this setting.
c. Background: Determines the background color.

5. Grid frame: Used to display a grid

a. Enable: Check to enable a grid
b. Color: Select the color for the grid lines
c. Horiz: the number of divisions that divide the X-axis.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
235 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

d. Verti: the number of divisions that divide the Y-axis.

6. Channel frame: these settings are used to configure the color of each line.
a. Channel: select the particular channel that you wish to change color properties.
b. Pen property frame:

i. Color: Select the particular color for the channel

ii. Width: Select the width of the line. Note: if a value other than 1 is selected for the width, the
style option is not available.
iii. Style: determines the style of the line displayed when width is set to 1.

7. Shape tab: used to configure the text labels and constant values assigned to each State.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 236

Option List

The Option List Object is used to write predefined values to a target PLC register based upon which state is selected
in a list. Up to 255 states are supported. The Option List Object can be displayed as either a simple list box or a
drop-down menu. Unique labels can be created for each state.

To create an Option List Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Option List.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
237 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Or click the Option List icon in the Object 1 toolbar. The New Option List Object dialog box appears:

2. Description: see section “General Properties” at the beginning of this chapter.

3. Attribute frame: this is used to determine which type of list box is used, color, and total number of states.

a. Mode: options are List box and Drop-down List. List box is a simple list in which all of the states are
shown. Drop-down List is a menu that opens when you click on it.

b. No. of state: range is 1 to 255. Note: that if the range is larger than the size of the object, a scroll down box
is used.
c. Background: color of the background of the list box.

d. Selection: color of the ‘selected’ or active state.

4. Control address frame: use to select the target PLC register. For more information on each field, see General
Properties section at the beginning of this chapter.

a. Write when button is released: if unchecked, the predefined constant value is written to the target PLC
register immediately after the state has been selected. If checked, the value is not written until the operator
removes his finger from the touchscreen.

Mapping tab: used to configure the text labels and constant values assigned to each State.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Representing Data with Graphics Objects 238

1.Mapping table:

The number of states shown depends upon the number of states selected in the Attribute frame. In this example,
there are a total of five states. Click on the entry in the Value column for each State to enter a new constant value:

Note: You cannot enter a value for the last (error) state. The error state is always represented by any value that is
not represented by one of the other states. Note: Negative values are not supported. Floating point values are
supported.

Also note that the values entered for each state are unique- not related to other values entered for other states. For
example, entering a value of 14 for State 2 in the example above is acceptable.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
239 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Notification frame: this optional feature can be used to set (or clear) a target PLC bit when the Multi-State Switch
object reads a value in the PLC register that is invalid. Note: the PLC must clear this bit after notification from the
OIT.

· Set ON or Set OFF- select which action the HMI takes when an error occurs.

Security frame: see section “General Properties” at beginning of this chapter.

Shape frame: Enabling a shape will overwrite any settings for the background color under the Option list tab.

Label frame: Determines the attributes of the text entered for each state on the Mapping tab.

Profile: see section “General Properties” at beginning of this chapter.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using and Creating Keypads 240

Chapter 11 - Using and Creating Keypads

The OIT operator must have a keypad available to enter new data when using the Numeric Input Object or the
ASCII Input Object. EasyBuilder includes group libraries that contain sample keypads to be placed onto a window
screen. You can also create your own custom keypads. This chapter focuses on how to create keypads, display
them on the window screen, and use them for entering data into PLC registers.

How to Create a Keypad

Any keypad that you create is actually composed of keys using the Function Key Object. The Function Key Object
can create alphanumeric keys as well as control keys, (i.e. Delete, Enter, Clear, etc.)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
241 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4 To create a Function Key Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Button-Function Key. Or click the Function Key icon in the
Part1 toolbar. The New Function Key Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Function Key part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the ASCII mode section, there are four control key options. Control keys are used during
data entry to perform a specific function.

Function Description
Configures the Function Key as an Enter key. When pressed, it will write the alphanumeric characters
[ENTER]
entered into a Numeric Input Object or ASCII Input Object to the target PLC register.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using and Creating Keypads 242

Configures the Function Key as a Delete key. When pressed, it will delete the last alphanumeric character
[BACK SPACE]
entered.
Configures the Function Key as a Clear key. When pressed, it will clear the data displayed in the Numeric
[CLEAR] Input Object or ASCII Input Object. Note: this key does not clear the actual target PLC register until the
Enter key is pressed.
[ESC] Configures the Function Key as an Escape key. When pressed, it will exit the editing mode.

4. Just below the four control key options, is the ASCII checkbox. Select this when you want to
configure the Function Key to enter an alphanumeric character. When this checkbox is
selected, the Character: box is activated. Use this box to enter the ASCII character you want
to use.
5. Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form.
6. Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Function Key object. If you need more
information on how to do this, consult Chapter 6 “Creating Graphics Objects”.
7. Click the Label tab to display the Label form.
8. Click the Use Label checkbox to use a label.
9. You can have a different label for each state of the Bit Lamp. In the State: box, enter the
state that you wish to edit, then enter the label for that state in the Content: box. Do the same
for the other state.
10. Enter the color that you want for the label in the Color: box. You can select a different color
for each label state.
11. Enter how you want the label to be positioned in the Align: box. You can select a different
position for each label state.
12. Finally, select the font style and size from their respective drop down menus.. You can select
a different font for each label state.
13. Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or ‘track’ with the
movement of one label when it is moved after the Function Key object is placed onto the
window. Click Duplicate this label to other states if you want to use the same text on all
states.
14. Click the Security tab if you would like to enable security for the function key and configure
security settings as described in previous sections.
15. Click OK. The New Function Key Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder
appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper
left corner of the screen. Move the part to the desired location on the window.
16. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the location of the label inside the
part by clicking once on the label. This will highlight the entire object. Now click on the
label again. Now only the label is highlighted, allowing you to move it without moving the
part. Note: if you double-click (click twice rapidly) then you will not highlight the label but
rather enter the Function Key Object’s Attribute dialog box.
To create a custom keypad, you create several of these Function Key Objects and group them together on a window
to form the keypad. Following the procedure outlined in Chapter 6, you can then save the keypad to a group library
for later use in other projects. Several predefined keypads are included with EasyBuilder. To use these keypads,
use the Call Group Library function and access the keypad library.

Displaying and Using a Keypad

Let’s go through a sample project that uses one of the predefined keypads included in EasyBuilder to edit a Numeric
Input Object and an ASCII Input Object. This example will show you how to place these objects on a window
screen, and then use the keypad to edit the data registers.
4To create a sample keypad entry screen
1. Start a new project file, with the initial screen configured as the startup screen. Note: this is
the default setting. Display the initial screen in the work area of EasyBuilder.
2. From the Objects menu, select Numeric Input. The New Numeric Object dialog box
appears.
3. Create a Numeric Input Object with the following parameters:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
243 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Tab Frame Parameter Value

Description Numeric Input Object
PLC Name: Local HMI
Read Address Device Type: LW
General
Address: 0
Window No 54:ASCII Middle
Keyboard
Popup position Select middle option in the right-hand row
Display Data Format 16-bit signed
Numeric Format
Number of Digits Left of Decimal Pt 5

4 For more information on how to use the Numeric Input Object, consult Chapter 8
“Representing Data with Graphics Objects”.

4. Create an ASCII Input Object with the following parameters:

Tab Frame Parameter Value

Description ASCII Input Object
PLC Name: Local HMI
Device Type LW
Read Address
General Address: 1
No. of words 12
Window No. 54. ASCII Middle
Keyboard
Popup position Select middle option in the right-hand row

4 For more information on how to use the ASCII Input Extend Object, consult Chapter 8
“Representing Data with Graphics Objects”.

5. Create two text boxes; one to identify the Numeric Input register, and one to label the ASCII
Input register.
4Editing data registers using a keypad
1. Save and compile the new project, then test the operation of the keypad by either running in
Simulation mode or by downloading the project to the OIT.
2. The following screen will appear:

3. Change the value of the Numeric Input register. Touch the Numeric Input Object to
activate the edit mode. The keypad will pop up and the 0 digit will start to blink.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Using and Creating Keypads 244

4. Using the keypad, enter digits 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. As you enter the digits, each one should
appear in the Numeric Input Object box.
5. Press the Backspace key to delete digit 5.
6. Try pressing any of the alpha characters (A-Z). Notice that alpha characters are not accepted
into a Numeric Input Object register.
7. Press the Clear key. Notice that the entire register is cleared to 0.
8. Enter digits 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, and then press the Enter key. The keypad closes but the value was
not accepted. This indicates that the value entered is out-of-range. Touch the numeric input
object again. Press the Clear key and enter 32767. Press the Enter key. Notice that this
value is accepted and blinking stops.
9. Touch the Numeric Input Object register again to activate editing mode. Enter five more
digits then press the Esc key. Notice that the entry is cancelled and the previous number
32767 is restored.
10. Change the value of the ASCII Input register. Touch the ASCII Input Object to activate
the edit mode.
11. Using the keypad, enter the character string “HELLO WORLD”. As you enter the characters,
each one should appear in the ASCII Input Object box. Press the Enter key to send the
characters to the OIT internal data register.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
245 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
 246
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends

Chapter 12 - Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends

This chapter focuses on three special graphic objects, which can be used to display PLC data registers. You read in
Chapter 6 how to use shapes and bitmaps to represent the data in PLC registers as states. You also read how to use
alphanumeric data fields to display the contents of PLC registers as either numbers or ASCII characters. We now
introduce three more options to display the data in PLC registers:

Bar Graph Objects Trend Display Objects Meter Display Objects

Creating Bar Graphs

The Bar Graph Object is used to represent the data in a 16-bit or 32-bit PLC register as a bar graph. You can
configure the bar graph to move up, down, right, or left. The bar graph can be configured with any base number
that represents 0 level and any span range. You can create the bar graph with an alarm low and high setting to
indicate to the OIT operator that an underflow/overflow alarm condition exists. In addition, you can set the alarm
low and high limits to be controlled by two additional PLC registers so that the low and high limits are variable. Bar
graphs can even be constructed with a shape or bitmap overlaying the bar graph to create flow tanks, temperature
gauges, etc.
4To create a Bar Graph Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Bar Graph. Or click the Bar Graph icon in the Part2 toolbar.
The New Bar Graph Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Bar Graph part. A description is not necessary
but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the device type from the drop down menu, and then indicate
the PLC register address. Select the data format.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
247 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4. Click on the Outline tab to display the outline form.

5. In the attribute section, select how the Bar Graph is to operate.

Function Option Description

Normal The bar starts at one end of the object, and moves to the other end.
Type The bar starts at some non-zero point defined by the Origin, and moves through the origin as the
Offset
value changes.
Zero The PLC Register values corresponding to an unfilled bargraph.
Origin The starting point of the bar when the Type is set to Offset.
Up The bargraph starts at the bottom of the object, and moves up as it fills.
Down The bargraph starts at the top of the object, and moves down as it fills.
Direction
Right The bargraph starts at the left of the object, and moves right as it fills.
Left The bargraph starts at the right of the object, and moves left as it fills.
Span The PLC Register values corresponding to a completely filled bargraph.
Bar Width
The percent of the object’s width that the bar occupies.
Ratio (%)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters, and Trends 248

6. The Bar Style/Color determines the appearance of the Bar Graph

Function Description
Frame Set the color of the outside of the bar graph.
Bar Set the color of the filled part of the bar.
Background Set the color of the unfilled part of the bar.
Bar Style Set the pattern of the filled part of the bar.

7. Set up the Target Indicator. This selects the color of the filled part of the bar when it reaches
a preset value.

Function Description
Enable When checked, the Target Indicator is active.
Color Set the color to change the bar when the value is equal to the Target Value.
Target Value The value at which to change the color of the bar.
Set a tolerance for the Target Value. When the value is less than or greater than the Target Value by this value,
Tolerance
the bar will remain in the selected color.

8. Select the Alarm Colors.

Function Description
Low Limit The value at which the bar will change to the Low Color.
Low Color The color to change the bar when the value reaches the Low Limit.
High Limit The value at which the bar will change to the High Color.
High Color The color to change the bar when the value reaches the High Limit.

9. Set up Dynamic Limits. When checked, the Target/Alarm Dynamic Address option allows
certain alarm limits to be read from the PLC / Controller. The Target Value, and Low and
High Limit fields are disabled. Data is read from the PLC as follows:

Specified Address Low Limit

Specified Address + 1 High Limit
Specified Address + 2 Target Value

10. Once the part is placed onto the window, you can adjust the attributes of the Bar Graph by
double-clicking on the part.

Creating Meter Displays

The Meter Display Object is used to represent the data in a 16-bit or 32-bit PLC register as a scaled meter. The
meter can be easily customized to the look that you want.
The Display Meter can be configured with any base number that represents 0 level and any span range.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
249 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create a Meter Display Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Meter Display. Or click the Meter Display icon in the Part2
toolbar. The New Display Meter Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Meter Display part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Read address frame, select the Device type from the drop down menu, and then specify
the PLC register address. Select the data format.
4. Click the Outline tab to display the Outline form. This is where you will configure all of the
attributes of your meter.

1010-100W7, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 250

5. In the Degree section, you can select the range of your meter, where the range is 0 to 360.
The start degree, 0 is at 12:00. Below are four examples of start and end degrees for different
meters:

Note that meters can have any start and end degree between 0 and 360.
6. The Background section allows you to select background options for the meter. The
following illustrations illustrates how your meter will appear with different options checked:

7. The Tick Marks section allows you to configure the length, scale and sub-scale of the tick
marks.
8. In the Pointer section, select arm style, color, length, and width.
9. The Pinpoint section allows you to adjust the style and size of the pinpoint. See the
illustration above to see the pinpoint.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
251 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

10. Select the Limits tab to display the Limits form.

11. In this section, you can configure a scale that goes on the face of the meter that shows by a
color indication when high and low limits have been exceeded. If you look at the example on
the previous page, you will see this is represented on the face of the meter as a red, yellow
and green strip. In the Value section, select the zero and span.
12. In the Range limits section, if you'd like to enable the limits, click the enable check box and
then select the colors for low, mid and high. Select the width, in pixels, of the color band.
The values from 'zero' to low limit will be on te 'low' color band; values from low limit to
high limit will be on the 'mid' color band; values greater than high limit will be on the 'high'
color band.
13. Select the low limit and high limit. If the limits are dynamic, click the Dynamic limits check
box and then configure the PLC addressing that pops up.
14. If you'd like a background shape to appear with your meter, click the Shape tag and select a
shape.
15. Click OK. The meter appears on the work area of EasyBuilder. Click to drag and place your
meter on your work area. If you need to reconfigure any of the properties, you may double
click on the object and the properties dialog box will reappear.

Creating Trend Displays & Data Sampling Objects

Data Sampling objects can be used to log historical data. Once data is historically logged, it can be saved to the
OIT's internal memory, or to an external memory source such as CompactFlash, USB or a PC.
The Trend Display Object is used to sample the data in a single or multiple 16-bit PLC registers and plot this data on
a time graph. You can configure the Trend Display as a single page or with multiple pages that can be viewed by
scrolling through the pages. The sampling rate and number of plots per page can be customized per trend graph.
You can display a maximum of 16 channels with varying colors to distinguish the channels. Finally, a hold feature
allows you to ‘freeze’ the graph and/or clear the graph.
In order to create a trend object, you must first create a number of data sampling objects from which to sample the
trends.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 252

To create a data sampling object

1. From the Objects menu, select Data Sampling. The Data Sampling Object Dialog appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
253 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. Click New...to create a new data sampling object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 254

3. Description: Enter a name for the object. This isn't necessary, but will help in later
identification of the object.
4. Max data records: Set the maximum number of records to log.
5. Select the Device type from the drop down menu, and then specify the PLC name and
address. Click Data Format... to set configure the format of each logged item. The Data
Format dialog appears. Click New... to call the configuration dialog.

6. Enter a Description for the data format and then select the Data type. Click OK to return to
the Data configuration dialog and then Exit to return to the Data Sampling dialog.
7. Click the enable check box in the Clear address section if you would like the data sample to
be cleared when the bit is momentarily set. If enabled, specify the PLC address and device
type.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
255 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

8. Click the enable check box in the Hold section if you would like the data sample to be paused
as long as the specified bit is set. If enabled, specify the PLC address and device type.
9. Select either time based or trigger based sampling of data. Time based samples data at
pre-set intervals of time. Trigger-based samples data when a specified bit undergoes a
specified change. If time-based, specify the sampling time interval (in seconds). If
trigger-based, specify Device type, PLC address and PLC name.
10. Check the auto stop check box if you would like the data sampling to automatically stop
when the number of records in Max data records has been reached. Otherwise, the existing
logged data will be deleted and new data will be recorded.
11. Select the type of memory to which you would like to save the data files, and then specify the
filename under which the data will be saved.
12. Click OK.
13. Follow steps 1-12 to create additional data sampling objects.
14. Click Exit to exit the data sampling object.
4 To create a Trend Display Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Trend Display. Or click the Trend Display icon in the Part2
toolbar. The New Trend Display Object dialog box appears.

2. In the Data Log Object Index, select the data sampling object whose data is to be trended
from the drop down menu.
3. For Display Mode, select whether the data showing will be historical data or data in real time.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 256

4. In channel no., select the number of pens tracking data. This number should be less than or
equal to the number of items configured in the selected data log index.
5. Select the name of the PLC to read/write to from the drop down menu.
6. Check the Enable checkbox in the Hold Control section if you'd like the trend to pause when
a specified bit is set, and then configure the PLC address and device type.
7. Click the Enable checkbox in the Watch line section if you'd like to place a watchline on the
trend that places a line at a specific register value, and then configure the PLC address and
device type.
8. Configure the History control section if the Display mode is set to history.
9. Click on the Trend tab to display the Trend form.

10. Enter a description for the trend. This is not necessary, but will help in identification later.
11. Select the frame color and the background color for the trend from the drop down menus.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
257 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

12. Check the Enable checkbox in the grid section if you would like the trend to display a grid,
and then configure the X and Y axis of the grid from the scroll boxes.
13. In the channel section, select the channel to configure from the drop-down menu, and then
select the pen properties for that channel. Next, select the value at which the pen will be at
the bottom of the trend (zero) and the span of the trend. Finally, check the Enable checkbox
if you would like the time and date to be displayed on the OIT then select the format in which
you'd like the time and date displayed.
14. Click the Shape tab to configure a background shape, if any.
15. Click the Profile tab if you'd like to position your trend using the properties dialog using the
X,Y position instead of dragging and placing it in the work area.
16. Click OK. The Trend appears on EasyBuilder's work area. Move the trend to place it on the
display. If you'd like to reconfigure any of its properties, double click on the trend to display
the Trend Display Object's Properties Dialog.

1010-1007, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 258

History Data Display

The History Data Display shows data captured by the Data Sampling object (for more information on using the Data
Sampling object, see Chapter 12: Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends, Section ‘Creating Trend Displays & Data
Sampling Objects’).

Data is displayed in tabular format with option to show the time and/or date of when data was captured. A control
register is used to determine which historical data record is displayed (i.e. most recent, yesterday, etc.) based upon
date of capture:

The OIT reads from the Sampling Object datalog file (*.dtl) immediately after the screen that contains the History
Data Display object is displayed. Note: the data is only read and updated whenever the screen is first displayed.
Data recorded to the datalog file (*.dtl) after the History Data Display object is shown will not appear on the History
Data Display object until the screen is refreshed (closed, then opened again). A maximum of 20 channels can be
displayed.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
259 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

To create a History Data Display Object

1. From the Objects menu, click History Data Display. Or click the History Data Display icon in the Object 2
toolbar. The New History Data Display dialog box appears:

2. Data Sampling Object index: select from drop-down list which data file to use. Data files are created using the
Data Sampling object.

3. Grid: Displays grid lines on the data table.

a. Enable: check to enable grid lines

b. Color: select color used for grid lines
c. Column Interval: enter the number of pixels that separate each column of data.

4. Profile color: determines the color of the background of the object.

a. Transparent: enable if you do not want a background color or frame to appear.
b. Frame: color for the perimeter frame
c. Background: color for the background of the object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 260

5. Text: select the font and size for all text that appears

a. Font: select the truetype font for the text

b. Size: select the size of the font

6. Time: enable to display the time when the data was captured by the Data Sampling object.

a. Style: select from HH:MM:SS, HH:MM, or DD:HH:MM

b. Color: determines the color used to display the time

7. Date: enable to display the date when the data was captured by the Data Sampling object.

a. Style: select from MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, DD.MM.YY or YY/MM/DD

b. Color: determines the color used to display the date

8. Sequence no: enable to display a sequence number of when the data was captured by the Data Sampling object.

a. Color: determines the color used to display the sequence number

9. Time ascending or Time descending: determines the order in which the data is displayed.

10. History Control frame: use to select the target PLC or internal OIT register that is used to determine which
data log file is displayed.

For example, suppose we have data log files that were recorded during a four day period- 20090615.dtl (June 15th),
20090616.dtl (June 16th), 20090617.dtl (June 17th), and 20090618.dtl (June 18th).

We choose to use internal OIT memory address LW100 for the History Control address. If the value in LW100 = 0,
then the History Data Display object will display the most recent data log record- in this example, 20090618.dtl
(June 18th). If the value in LW100 = 1, then 20090617.dtl (June 17th) is displayed, and so on.

a. PLC Name: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.

b. Device type: same as above

c. History Control address: this is the specific PLC address from the Device Type memory area.
The History Control Address is used to determine which data log file is displayed. A value of 0 displays the
most recent file, etc.
d. Index Register: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
261 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Data Format tab: used to configure how the data appears for each column:

1. Channel: Channels are configured in groups of eight (Note: maximum of 20 channels). Use this pull-down box
to select each group.

2. Channel #0-19 [16-bit Unsigned] frame: Configuration information for each channel. Description in parentheses
tells you what format is used for that data variable.

3. Display checkbox: check to enable viewing that data variable.

4. Left of decimal pt: determines the number of digits that can be displayed to the left of the decimal point.

5. Right of decimal pt: determines the number of digits that can be displayed to the right of the decimal point.

Note: if 0, then no decimal point is displayed.

6. Alignment: options are center, right, and left justified.

7. Leading zero: check to display leading zeroes

8. Color: select the color used to display the data.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Bar Graphs, Meters and Trends 262

Title tab: used to configure a title bar or legend at the top of the data columns:

1. Use title: check to use the Title bar option.

2. Title background frame: determines color of background on title bar

a. Transparent: check to remove background color

b .Color: select from drop-down color box

3.Title name: default name of each column

4. Title: name assigned to appear at the top of each column

5. Label Library: None = not used, Used = Label Library used instead of direct text entry. To assign a Label Tag,
highlight the channel you wish to modify and click on the Setting… button. Note: for more information on using
Label Libraries, see Chapter 9 – Creating and Using Databases and Languages, section ‘Using the Label Library’

6. Label tag: blank = not used, or the particular name of the label tag used.

Shape tab: refer to beginning of this section.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Capturing Alarms and Events 263

Chapter 13 - Capturing Alarms and Events

This chapter looks at how the Silver Series uses alarms and events.

Using Alarms
EasyBuilder has three parts that are used to perform alarm functions: the Alarm Scan object, the Alarm Display
object, and the Alarm Bar object. The Alarm/Event Log object monitors alarm conditions and alerts the Alarm
Display object and the Alarm Bar object when an alarm condition occurs. Use the Alarm Display object if you want
to display a scrollable list of all alarms that are active. Use the Alarm Bar object to display all active alarms on a
single horizontally scrolling line (like a marquee).

Monitoring Alarms with the Alarm/Event Log

The Alarm/Event Log continuously monitors PLC coils to determine if an alarm condition has occurred. Once an
alarm is active, the Alarm Scan Object directs a string of characters associated with that alarm to the Alarm Display
Object and the Alarm Bar Object for display on the OIT screen.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
264 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4 To create an Alarm/Event Log

1. From the Objects menu, click Alarm-Alarm (Event) Log. Or click the Alarm (Event) Log
icon in the Draw toolbar. The Alarm(Event) Log dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Capturing Alarms and Events 265

2. Click the New... button. The Alarm Event Log Properties dialog appears.

3. Select a priority level from the drop down menu.

4. Select either bit or word from the address type drop down menu, and then select the scan time
(in millisec) from the drop-down menu.
5. Select the PLC name, device type and read address, as well as the format in the Read Address
section.
6. Click the Enable checkbox in the Notification section to have a specific bit set or cleared
when the alarm condition is reached, and the specify the condition.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
266 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

7. Click the Message tab to display the Message form.

8. Enter the message to display when the alarm or event is triggered. If you would like to
configure the message in different languages, click Label and follow the instructions in
Chapter 7 - Creating Databases and Languages.
9. In the Write value window, enter the window number to display once the alarm or event is
acknowledged.
10. Click the Enable checkbox in the Sound section to have the OIT play a sound when the alarm
is triggered. Click Sound library...to select a sound from the sound libraries. If no sound is
selected, the default sound is a beep. Click Play to preview the sound.
11. Click OK to return to the Alarm (Event) Log dialog. You may select a location to save
History files by selecting one of the check boxes. You may also configure additional
Alarm/Event log items here. Click Close when you are finished.

Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Display Object

Though the Alarm (Event) Log Object continuously monitors the PLC for alarms, it cannot display the alarms
without the Alarm Display Object or the Alarm Bar Object. The Alarm Display Object takes the alarm strings sent
to it from the Alarm (Event) Log Object and displays them on a window screen as a list. The list contains all of the
active alarms occurring with the most recently activated alarm at the top of the list. You do not have to display the
entire list of alarms on a window screen. You can limit the viewable alarms to a ‘scrollable window’ that displays a
given number of lines. You can then create a register that allows you to scroll through the list of alarms using the
scrollable window.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Capturing Alarms and Events 267

4To create an Alarm Display Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Alarm-Alarm Display. Or click the Alarm Display icon in
the Part2 toolbar. The New Alarm Display Object dialog box appears.

2. Include categories: to include all categories (there can be up to four categories), set this at 0
to 0.
3. Select frame and background colors from the drop down menus.
4. Sort the order in which the alarms will appear - either ascending or descending.
5. Check the Event trigger time checkbox if you'd like the time the event was triggered to
appear in the alarm listing, and then select the format you'd like the time listing to appear.
6. Click the Shape tab to configure a background shape, if you'd like one.
7. Click the Font tab to configure the font.
8. Click OK. The Alarm display appears on the work area of EasyBuilder. Drag it to place it
where you'd like on the display.

Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Bar Object

The Alarm Bar Object displays alarms scrolling horizontally along a single line. The alarm bar continuously scrolls
each alarm until the alarm is no longer active. If more than one alarm is active, the Alarm Bar Object appends each
alarm to the string of characters scrolled. This part can be used on window screens where space is very limited. It
also allows you to display long alarm text strings that are too long to be shown in the Alarm Display Object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
268 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

4To create an Alarm Bar Object

1. From the Objects menu, click Alarm-Alarm Bar. Or click the Alarm Bar icon in the Part2
toolbar. The Create Alarm Bar Object dialog box appears.

2. Include categories: to include all categories (there can be up to four categories), set this at 0
to 0.
3. Select scroll speed from the drop down menu to adjust the speed at which the message scrolls
across the alarm bar.
4. Select frame and background colors from the drop down menus.
5. Sort the order in which the alarms will appear - either ascending or descending.
6. Check the Event trigger time checkbox if you'd like the time the event was triggered to
appear in the alarm listing, and then select the format you'd like the time listing to appear.
7. Click the Shape tab to configure a background shape, if you'd like one.
8. Click the Font tab to configure the font.
9. Click OK. The Alarm bar appears on the work area of EasyBuilder. Drag it to place it where
you'd like on the display.
The Alarm Bar Object scrolls through each character of an alarm string at a predefined rate. You can change the
rate at which the characters scroll by doing the following.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Capturing Alarms and Events 269

Using Events
EasyBuilder has two parts that are used to perform Event functions: the Event Log object and the Event Display
object. The Event Log object monitors events and alerts the Event Display when an event is triggered. The Silver
Series monitors a maximum of 200 events but you can program the OIT to monitor up to an additional 1000 events.

Monitoring Events With the Event Log Object

The Event Log Object continuously monitors PLC coils and registers to determine if an event has occurred. Once
an event has triggered, the Event Log Object directs a string of characters associated with that event to the Event
Display Object for display on the HMI screen. The OIT operator can acknowledge each event by touching the
string of characters that have been displayed. Once acknowledged, the Event Log Object has the option of calling a
popup window.
4To create an Event Log Object
See the section on the Alarm (Event) Log.

Displaying Events Using the Event Display Object

Though the Event Log Object continuously monitors the PLC for triggered events, it cannot display the events
without the Event Display Object. The Event Display Object takes the event strings sent to it from the Event Log
Object and displays them on a window screen as a list. The list contains all of the events that have occurred with the
most recently triggered event at the top of the list. You do not have to display the entire list of events on a window
screen. You can limit the viewable events to a ‘scrollable window’ that displays a given number of lines. You can
then create a register that allows you to scroll through the list of events using the scrollable window. An
acknowledge feature allows the OIT operator to touch an event recorded in the event list to display a popup
window. The popup window can than be used to display further instructions to the OIT operator or to perform some
operation.
4 To create an Event Display Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Alarm- Event Display. Or click the Event Display icon in
the Part2 toolbar. The New Event Display Object dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Event Display part. A description is not
necessary but does help identify the purpose of the part.
3. Specify the PLC name from the drop-down menu, and then select either real-time or history
as the mode for the events to be displayed.
4. In the Write Address section, select the Device type, address and type.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
270 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

5. Click on the Event Display tab to display the Event Display form.

6. Include categories: to include all categories (there can be up to four categories), set this at 0
to 0.
7. Select click or double click to acknowledge event with a single or double touch in the
acknowledge style drop-down menu. Then select the maximum number of events before the
OIT will begin overwriting old events. The valid range is 10-1000.
8. Select colors for background, frame, select box, acknowledge and return to normal.
9. Check the Sequence no check box to add a unique serial number to each event.
10. Select the order in which events will be sorted.
11. Check the Event trigger date check box to have the time the event is triggered added to each
event, and then choose your preference for the time format.
12. Click the Shape tab to add a background shape, if desired.
13. Click the Font tab to configure the font.
14. Click OK. The object appears on the work area of EasyBuilder. Place it in the desired
location.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 271

Chapter 14 - Data and Recipe Transfer Objects

EasyBuilder includes a Data Transfer object and a Recipe Transfer object, which enable data to be copied from one
or more registers located in the PLC or the OIT to other registers. The Data Transfer object is used to continuously
transfer data at a predefined rate. The Recipe Transfer object is a touchscreen object that transfers data when
activated by the OIT operator.

Using the Data Transfer Object

In some projects you create, you may need to transfer large blocks of data from PLC/OIT registers to other
PLC/OIT registers. The Data Transfer Object is used to copy data from one or more PLC registers or OIT internal
memory to other registers continuously on a timed interval. There is no limit to the number of Data Transfer
Objects that you can create other than the OIT’s available memory. Each Object created can transfer from 1-16
continuous registers or 1-255 coils.
There are two types of data transfer objects available, time-based and trigger based. Time-based data transfer object
periodically transfers data from one set of PLC registers to another at a predetermined interval. The interval is
adjustable from 0 (the data is transferred continuously) to 25.5 seconds, in 0.1 second steps.
The trigger-based data transfer object transfers word-based data from a specified source address to another specified
source address when triggered by the controller. This can be used to transfer recipe data, or any other data, from
one device to another.
4To create at Time-based Data Transfer Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Data Transfer. Or click the Data Transfer icon in the Draw
toolbar. The Data Transfer Object dialog box appears.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
272 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. Click the New... button. The Data Transfer (Time-based)Object dialog box appears.

3. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Data Transfer part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
4. In the Attribute box, configure the Address type to transfer whether by bit or word, the
interval of transfer and the number of bits or words to transfer.
5. In the Source address frame, select the PLC name and device type from their drop down
menus and then configure the address.
6. In the Destination address frame, select the PLC coils or registers that receive the data.
7. Click OK to close the Data Transfer Object dialog. The Data Transfer Object dialog box
reappears with the new entry listed. You can edit the attributes of an existing Data Transfer
object by clicking on the Settings... button. Any entries can be deleted by clicking on the
Delete button.
8. Click Exit to close the Data Transfer Object dialog box. The Data Transfer Object is active
no matter what windows are currently displayed on the OIT screen; therefore, you do not
have to place the object onto a window screen.

Using the Recipe Transfer (Data Transfer, Trigger Based) Object

The Data Transfer, Trigger-Based (Recipe Transfer) Object is used to download or save data from one or more PLC
registers to the OIT’s internal registers that are reserved for recipes. This occurs when the object is activated by a
press from the OIT operator. Each Object created can transfer from 1-32767 continuous registers.
4 To create a Recipe Transfer (Data Transfer, Trigger Based) Object
1. From the Objects menu, click Data Transfer (Trigger-based). Or click the Data Transfer

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 273

(trigger-based) icon in the object 2 toolbar. The New Data Transfer (Trigger-based) Object
dialog box appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the Recipe Transfer part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.
3. In the Source Address frame, select the PLC registers that are to be saved or downloaded. The
No. of words box is used to specify the total number of registers used. Select the PLC name
and device type from their respective drop-down menus. Check the Index register checkbox
if you'd like a preset offset to be added to the specified register, and then select the index from
the drop-down box.
4. In the Destination Address frame, select the PLC registers that are to be saved or downloaded
to. Destination address information is configured in the same way as Source Address
information in #3 above.
5. In the Attribute frame, select either touch trigger or external trigger. If selecting external
trigger, configure trigger mode and trigger address information that pops up.
6. Click the Security tab and configure security settings, if needed.
7. Click the Shape tab to configure background shape, if needed.
8. Click the Label tab to apply a text label, if needed.
9. Click OK.

Creating a Recipe
A recipe consists of a number of registers using the RW or RB devices. These devices are in a non-volatile area of
the OITs’ internal memory area. A recipe is created by using the OIT’s built-in Parts to store data in the RW/RB
devices, and then transferring that data to the selected PLC registers.

Recipe Devices There are 4 types of Recipe devices: Recipe Word (RW) , Indexed address Recipe words (RWI),
Recipe Bit (RB), and Indexed address Recipe Bit (RBI). The usage of RW and RB devices is the

1010-1007W, Rev 06
274 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

same. Therefore, in the following discussion, Rn refers to both RW and RB devices, and RnI
refers to both RWI and RBI devices.
Rn Device Refers to a direct Rn address. That is, the value placed in the Address field of an Rn device refers
directly to the Rn address. For example, Rn100 refers directly to the data at address Rn100.
RnI Device An address with an RnI device is an Indexed address. The address referred to by an RnI device is
actually the specified address plus an indexed offset. The offset is the value in address LW9000.
For example, suppose address LW9000 contains the value 50, and the Address field of an RnI
device is set to 100. This Indexed address actually refers to the data at address Rn150.

š RB devices use the same memory area as the RW devices. The RB device allows
Bit-level access to recipe data. The bit address is specified by using the RW address,
followed by the bit number 0-F (hex). For example, Bit RB0 is Bit 0 in RW0; Bit
RW2047F is Bit 16 in RW2047.

Rn Devices Vs RnI Devices

RnI devices Indexed address devices are most useful when it is necessary to ‘page’ through a number of
recipes. RnI devices allow a single window to manage all recipe items. Conversely, the use of Rn
devices requires a separate window for each recipe, with each object on each window having a
separate address. This not only uses more of the OIT’s resources, but could also lead to
configuration errors as objects are copied, pasted, and edited.
Rn devices Use when it is desired to show unique information from a recipe. For example, it might be
necessary to show, one window, the names of all of the recipes.

4 For an example of how to create recipes, please consult the EZware-5000 online Help
file.

Backup Part
The Backup part is used to copy Recipe, Event, or Historical data to one of the USB memory devices attached to the
OIT. The copy can be triggered by a touch or by a bit transition.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 276

To create a backup part:

1. From the Object menu, select Backup, or click the Backup icon on the Object2 toolbar. The
New Backup dialog appears.

2. Use the Description: box to enter a title for the MultiState Switch part. A description is not
necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part.

Select which dataset to back up. Data Log is available only if a Data Sample has
Source
been set up.
Select the Data Sample set to back up. Available only when the Source is set to
Data Sampling Object Index
Data Log.
Select which USB device to back the data up to. Note: USB1 is the device that
Backup Position
was installed first; USB2 is the device that was installed last.
Range Start Select whether to start with Today’s data or Yesterday’s data.
Range Within Select the number of days’ worth of data to back up.
Touch Trigger causes the backup to execute when the object is touched.
Attribute Mode
External Trigger causes the backup to execute when the specified bit transitions.
Specify how the bit must change to trigger the backup. Available only when
Attribute Trigger Mode
Attribute Mode is set to External Trigger.
Specify the bit address with which to trigger the backup. Available only when
Trigger Address
Attribute Mode is set to External Trigger.

3. Click the Security tab and configure security settings, if needed.

4. Click the Shape tab to configure background shape, if needed.
5. Click the Label tab to apply a text label, if needed.
6. Click OK.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
276 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 277

Chapter 15 - Macros

Using Macros
The “macro” language in EasyBuilder allows the programmer to perform simple transfers of data and/or simple to
complex conditional logic and transfers.
Macros are high-level language programs that can run inside the OIT to perform various data transfers and can
perform conditional logic. They are useful for doing tasks that are not supported in a standard object or feature of
the OIT. The macro language combines syntax elements of C, C++ and a little of its own style.
Previous experience in programming with C or C++ would be helpful when developing macros. It is not the scope
of this document to explain concepts of high-level language programming and the basics such as: variable data
types, arrays, conditional logic, and variable passing. However, it is the scope of this document to discuss the
commands and command structures that are required in building macros.

Macro Sample and Implementation

Macros can be used for customizing an application or when a special operation is needed that the normal OIT
objects (set bit, data transfer, etc) do not provide. A few possibilities are listed:
• Unusual or non-linear scaling of data
• Displaying the result of arithmetic operations on 2 or more PLC register values
• Indirect addressing (where a PLC register holds the address of the desired data)
• Lookup tables
• Transferring Data once, instead of periodically
• Writing data to the PLC in a specific sequence
• Timed splash screens
A macro is written using the “macro” utility found in the ‘Tools’ menu list of Easy Builder. The ‘Add’ button will
create a new worksheet to program a new macro. The programmer first gives the macro a name in the top right
corner. Then programming can be added. After the code is finished, it needs compiled. If the code compiles
correctly there will be no errors and the macro name will be added to the top list. If the macro does not compile
correctly it will display error codes. If the programmer should cancel out from creating the macro before a
successful compile, it will put the macro into the bottom panel of the macro list and it will not be available as a
usable macro, but the text will remain to be edited later.
The macros are triggered by a setting a bit or a function key. The bit is specified in the ‘PLC Control Object’ list.
The bit may be a local bit ‘LB’ or it may be a PLC bit. Each macro created will have a unique name and bit.
When a specified bit is set high so it executes a specific macro, the macro will be entered into and its variables
initialized. The macro will run its sequence of events and will exit when finished. The bit that called the macro into
execution should be cleared by the macro before it exits, otherwise the macro will immediately be entered again
upon exit. If this immediate re-entry should happen, this could form an endless loop and will certainly cause a
taxing of the CPU time and cause slow screen refreshing and communications.
A sample macro is listed below which reads two local word registers and adds them together and stores them into
another register location:
macro_command main()

short num1
short num2
short result
bool AllDone = 0

// get two registers to add together

// (LW0 & LW1)
GetData(num1, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 0, 1)
GetData(num2, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 1, 1)

// add the values

1010-1007W, Rev 06
278 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

result = num1 + num2

// store the result

SetData(result, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 2, 1)

// clear the macro trigger bit

SetData(AllDone, “Local HMI”, LB_BIN, 1, 1)

end macro_command
The macro was named “AddTwo” and the bit that executed this macro was LB:1. After the macro was written, a
‘PLC Control Object’ was added where the ‘Type of control’ was selected first to be ‘Execute macro program’.
Then the device type showed what bit types were available. A ‘LB’ was selected and the address ‘1’ was entered.
Finally, the macro name was selected. Below shows the PLC control object attribute window.

PLC Object's Attributes

Project Example of Add 2

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 279

Toggle Switch Objects Attributes Dialog

In the example above, a toggle switch object was placed on the screen as a ‘+’ button. When this button is pushed, it
forces LB:1 to ON and the ‘AddTwo’ macro executes, storing the result in LW:2 and turning LB:1 to OFF and the
macro stops.

Variables, Declarations and Memory Usage

Variables, constants & functions are named by the programmer. Variables and constants are called operands.
Variable names can be any character or number (a-z, A-Z, 0-9, or ‘_’) and can be as many characters as you need to
describe it (the compiler has been tested to variable name lengths of 32 characters, but it is best to keep the variable
names small for ease of reading the code). Variable names are not case sensitive, so ‘result’ is the same as ‘ReSult’
or ‘RESULT’. Variable names must always start with a letter (i.e. variables cannot begin with a number or the
underscore ‘_’ character).

Memory Usage
Macros use a minimum of about 2.5K, plus the memory required for each variable type:
• float: 4 bytes (32-bits)
• int: 4 bytes (32-bits)
• short: 2 bytes (16-bits)
• char: 1 byte (8-bits)

1010-1007W, Rev 06
280 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

• bool: 1 bit
• arrays: the corresponding number of bytes for each element, plus another 2 bytes for the index
Macros use memory from the background task (defined as Window 0 ) area. There is a default memory size of
320K available for macros (only 220K is allotted if the ‘Fast Selection’ task bar is enabled) and the there are other
background task objects that also use memory in this area, such as:
• Trends
• Data Transfers
• Alarms
• Events
• PLC Controls
• Printer functions

š If the application exceeds the 320k limit, both the simulator and the OIT will display a
System Severe Error message.

Variable Declarations
Each variable that will be used in the macro needs to be declared as a specific ‘type’ of register. The declarations are
listed as the first part of the macro. Any declarations contained within the macro function is considered ‘Local’ and
any variable outside the macro function is considered ‘Global’. Local variables are only seen within the function
they are declared in. Global variables retain their values and can be globally used by all functions. Below, are listed
the various data types that can be declared:

TypeDescription
Float
Single-Precision Floating point variable (32-bit signed,
IEEE-754 format)
Int
Integer variable (32-bit signed)
Short
Short integer variable (16-bit signed)
Char
Character variable (8-bit unsigned)
Bool
Boolean variable (1-bit)

š Variables inside macros are initialized to all ‘1’s as a default (i.e. 0xFFFF), so don’t
assume they are zero values when you enter the macro. It is good programming
practice to initialize variables during declaration, or use assignment statements before
they are used.

Variable Initialization
Initialize a value of variable in the declaration statement directly. (e.g: int RPM = 75) Use the assignment operator
(=) to initialize a value to the variable. Variables can be declared and initialized in the following manor:
Stacked Example: Inline Example (separate like-types with a comma):

short a = 0
short b = 0
short c = 0
short a=0, b=0, c=0

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 281

š Variables contain an unknown, random value when declared. Variables must be

initialized before they are used.

Array Initialization

Formats
int MyArray[10] = {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}
char LetterArray[6] = ‘MYWORD’
The initial values are written within the brackets {} and are divided by comma (,). These values are assigned in
order from left to right starting from array index=0.
Constants
A constant is a numeric or boolean value that does not change. Constants may be written as any of the following:

Written As Examples
Decimal constant 1234 short MyVal = 1234
Hexadecimal constant 0xFA20 short MyVal = 0xFA20
ASCII code (character constant) ‘ABCD’ char String[4] = ‘ABCD’
Boolean: True (not zero), False (zero) True, 1, False, 0 bool Done = 0, or, bool Done = False

Reserved Words
The following symbols and names are keywords that are reserved for use by macros. They cannot be used (as a
complete name) in any function name, array name, or variable name. However, the reserved words may be
contained within a variable name such as: my_int, TheEnd, etc.

And Else next Then

bool End not To
Break False Or True
BIN float return void
BCD For select wend
char GetData SetData While
Continue If short xor
down int Step

Operator
Below is a list of the recognized operators.

Group Name Sym

Assignment: =
Assignment operator: Addition: +
Subtraction: -
Multiplication: *
Division: /
Modulo: %
Comparison operators: Less than: <
Less than or equal
<=
to:
Greater than: >

1010-1007W, Rev 06
282 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Greater than or
>=
equal to:
Is equal to: ==
Not equal to: <>
Logic operators: Conditional 'AND': AND
Conditional 'OR': OR
Exclusive 'OR': XOR
Boolean 'NOT': NOT
Bitwise and shift
Left shift: <<
operators:
Right shift: >>
Bitwise 'AND' &
Bitwise 'OR' |
Bitwise 'XOR' ^
Bitwise
~
complement:

Order of Precedence
The process order of many operators within an expression is called the ‘order of precedence’. Priority of the same
kind of operator (From left to right, from top to bottom)

Arithmetic operator: ( * , / ) (%) (+,-)

Bitwise & Shift operators: From left to right within the expression
Comparison operator: From left to right within the expression
Logic operator: Not And Or Xor,
• Arithmetic operator is higher priority than a Bitwise operator
• Bitwise operator is higher priority than a Comparison operator
• Logic operator is higher priority than an Assignment operator

Main Functions and Sub-functions

The macro must have one and only one “Macro_Command main()” function which is the execution start point of
any macro file. Any sub-functions must be pre-defined and written before the main() function.
The format is:
Macro_Command main( )
// The main macro code goes here
End Macro_Command
Any other sub functions must be declared before the main() function can use it, for example:
Sub SQR(int MyVar )
// sub routine code goes here
End Sub
Macro_Command main( )
// The main macro code goes here
Result = SQR(MyNum) //The sub function “SQR()” is
called
End macro command

Local and Global Variables

Local variables exist only within the function in which they are defined.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 283

Global variables exist throughout the entire macro, and are available for any function in the macro. NOTE: If a
local variable has the same name as a global variable, the compiler will use the local variable in the function instead.

š Global variables are global only within the macro file in which they exist. It is not
possible to share variables between different macro files. To share data between macro
files, read/write the data to share into the HMI’s Local Word (LW) and/or Local Bit
(LB) addresses using the macro’s GetData() and SetData()UM_PLC functions.

Creating Variable Arrays

Arrays are fixed-depth and 1-dimensional only. Arrays can contain up to 65,535 elements. The type is the
declaration of the array of elements, such as an array of ints, or shorts, or bools, etc. The array_size is the number of
elements to contain in the array, such as an array of [10] would contain 10 elements of the declared type. The first
register in an array always begins with the 0th element and the last register is the declared number of elements minus
1.
The format is: [type] Array_Name[Array_Size]
For example:
char table[100]
The above declaration defines an array of 100 type ‘char’ registers named ‘table’. The first element in table is
address 0 and the last is 99, so it would be used as:

char FirstElement
char LastElement

FirstElement=table[0]
LastElement=table[99]

Using Macros Within Recipes

The macro utility can easily use the recipe memory area. There are 65535 recipe word registers that are available to
the user for general use (addresses RW:0 to RW:65535).
Register types: RW, RWI, and the pointer LW:9000 can be used to read or write the recipe memory area. ‘RW’
registers are used to directly address a recipe register. ‘RWI’ registers are used to indirectly address a recipe register
by using the pointer in local word memory LW:9000. If indirect addressing is used, then the direct recipe address is
determined by adding the value contained in LW:9000 to the address of the RWI register. For instance, to indirectly
point to the direct recipe address RW:20, an example would be that the macro would store the value 15 into the
LW:9000 pointer and then use an RWI address 5 (RWI:5) to GetData() or SetData() {LW:9000 = 15 + RWI:5 à
RW:20}.

š The pointer has a maximum limitation of 32767, so LW:9000 can indirectly address
from an offset of 0 to 32767. To indirectly address recipe registers above 32767, you
will need to have the RWI address set to a higher address.
The macro code on the next page will clear all general-use recipe memory area. Because of the pointer’s limitation
(max of LW:9000 = 32767), it breaks up the incrementing of memory into two sections, the lower half (0 to 29999)
and upper half (30000 to 59999).

macro_command main()

int Address = 0
int Initial = 0
short Done = 0
short Section = 1

// LW2 is used as an indicator

1010-1007W, Rev 06
284 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

SetData(Section, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 2, 1)

for Address = 0 to 29999

// increment the address
SetData(Address, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 9000, 1)

// write a 0 to the current address

SetData(Initial, “Local HMI”, RWI_BIN, 0, 1)
next address

// do the second half

Section = 2
SetData(Section, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 2, 1)

// adjust actual address by using LW9000

for Address = 0 to 29999

// increment address
SetData(Address, “Local HMI”, LW_BIN, 9000, 1)

// write a 0 to the current address

SetData(Initial, “Local HMI”, RWI_BIN, 30000, 1)
next address

// turn off macro trigger, LB2

SetData(Initial, “Local HMI”, LB_BIN, 2, 1)

end macro_command

Statements, Conditions & Expressions

An expression combines constants, variables, arrays, functions, and operators under certain rules. Expressions can
be logical or mathematical equations.
Below are listed some of the different styles of statements:

• A declaration (definition) statement is constructed like the following:

Format Examples Explanation

short This defines the name of the variable
type name
MyVar register and its type
This defines an array name and the
type name Short [constant] is the number of ‘type elements’
[constant] MyVars[10] in the array

• An assignment statement will transfer (assign) an expression to a variable. The form is:

Format Examples Explanation

MyVar = 10 This assigns the result of the expression to
variable = expression
MyVar = x + y a variable

• A logic or conditional statement processes a logic expression and branches depending on the
result. This assigns the result of the expression to a variable. The ending statement ‘End If’ is
written as two words, not one word. Note that there is a difference between the conditional equality
noted by two equal signs ‘= =’ (read as: ‘is equal to’) and the assignment equality noted by only one
equal sign ‘=’.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 285

Format Examples
If x == 1 Then
y = y * 5
z = z – 12
Else
If Condition Then y = y * 2
[ Statements ] z=y-1
Else End If
[else statements]
End If If (x == 0 OR x == 1) AND y == 0 Then
z = 10
Else
z=5
End If

A looping control statement is used for looping a pre-determined number of times. For counting up, use the
keyword To. For counting down, use the keyword Down. Counter Necessary. The counter of looping control. It
can be integer o character.
Start
Necessary. The initial value of Counter.
End
Necessary. The end value of Counter.
Step
Options. The increment decrement step of Counter. It can be integer an can be omitted when value is 1.
Statements
• Optional. Statement block between For and Next which will be executed.

Format Examples
For n = 100 Down 0 Step 3
n = n * 2
Next n

For counter = start To/Down end [Step

steps ]
[Statements]
Next [counter] For loop = 0 To 20 Step 2
loop = (loop + 1) *2
Next loop

While – Wend statement

Loop an unknown number of times. Looping is controlled by the Condition. When Condition is TRUE, the
statements will be executed repetitively until the condition turns to FALSE.

Condition
Necessary. An expression which evaluates to TRUE or FALSE.

Statements
Optional. Statement block.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
286 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

break
Used in looping control or select statement. It skips immediately to the end of the statement.

continue
Used in looping control statement. It quits the current iteration of a loop and starts the next one.

return
Returns to the function or module that called the current function.

Format Examples

While b [0]
a[i] = 20 + i + * 10
If a[i ]== 120 Then
While [Condition]
c = 200
[Statements]
Break
Wend
End If
i = i + 1
Wend

Boolean expressions
The value of Boolean expression is zero means FALSE.
The value of Boolean expression is not zero means TRUE.

Function Calls and Passing Parameters

A sub-function must be defined before its execution and is therefore placed before the main() macro function. If
there is an entry attempt into a function before it is first defined in the macro program will create a compiler error
‘Function not defined’.
Sub int SQR(int x) //This is the sub-function that squares a
number
x = x * x
return x
End Sub
Macro_Command main( ) // This main function calls the SQR()
function.
int I = 5
I = SQR(I)
// Write the result to a LW
End Macro_Command

The above example code defines a sub-function called SQR(). This sub-function allows one variable to be passed
into it. The function then takes the value passed to it, multiplies its value by itself and then stores the result back
into the same variable. The result is returned back to the calling function.

Reading & Writing External Registers in a Macro

A macro program can communicate with external PLC data registers and I/O. The function GetData() receives data
from a PLC in the device table (or the OIT’s local LW and LB memory). The function SetData() sends data to the
PLC (or the OIT’s local LW and LB memory).
The GetData() or the SetData() can be hand typed according to the format listed below, or the “PLC API” button
located at the bottom-left of the macro editor dialog box allows the user to generate the GetData() or SetData()
function code by selecting the appropriate responses within the PLC API dialog box. Be sure to declare all variables
before using the ‘PLC API’ option. To set up the following functions, place the cursor after the declarations, and

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 287

then press the PLC API button. This way, all variables will be available in a drop-down menu list within the ‘PLC
API’ dialog.
GetData() Function
This function reads data from a register location in the OIT or PLC memory, and stores it into a variable.
The format for the GetData() function is:
GetData(DestVariable, PLC Name, Addr_Type, Address, NumElements)

Parameter Description Example(s)

The name of the variable to store the
DestVariable data that is captured
MyVar, InputArray[0]

The name assigned to the controller in

PLC Name "Local HMI", "Modbus RTU"
the device table
The device type and encoding method LW_Binplc, 4x_Binplc,
Addr_Type (binary or BCD) of the PLC data. 0x_Binaux, RW_Bcdplc
0, 100, (an address that
The address offset in the PLC (must be has a decimal point is
Address written as a constant whole number – no written here without the
decimals – no variables) ‘.’ So 1.03 is written as
103
Number of elements to read/write (must
be at least 1 and it must be a constant
NumElements number) If the number of elements is 1, 16, 100
more than 1, the ‘DestVariable’
parameter must be declared as an array.

SetData() Function
SetData( DestData ,Addr_Type , Address , NumElements )
Description: Writes data from a variable to a location in the PLC memory.

Parameter Description Example(S)

The name of the variable to retrieve the
DestData data from
The Name assigned to the controller in
PLC Name "Local HMI", "Modbus RTU"
the device table
The device type and encoding method
Addr_Type (binary or BCD) of the PLC data

Address The address offset in the PLC

NumElements Number of words

The number of registers actually read from or written to depends on both the type of the DestData variable and the
value of Number of Elements. The Number of Elements refers to the number of elements of the DestData type, not
necessarily the number of registers.

Actual Number of 16-bit

Type of DestData Number of Elements
Registers Read/Written
Float (32-bit) 1 2
Float (32-bit) 2 4
Int (32-bit) 1 2
Int (32-bit) 2 4
Short (16-bit) 1 1
Short (16-bit) 2 2

1010-1007W, Rev 06
288 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Char (8-bit) 1 1
Char (8-bit) 1 1
Bool (8-bit) 2 1
Bool (8-bit) 1 1

When a GetData() or SetData() function is executed using a 32-bit data type (Int or Float), the function will
automatically convert the data. For example:

// get a floating point value from a modbus device

// note that two registers will actually be read,
// since a floating point value occupies 2 registers
macro_command main()
float f
GetData(f, “MODBUS”, 4x_BIN, 101, 1) // f will contain a floating point
value
end macro_command
// get (5) 32-bit integer values from the HMIs internal storage
// note that 10 registers will actually be read,
// since each integer value occupies 2 words
macro_command main()
int Values[5]
GetData(Values[0], “Local HMI”, LW, 200, 5) // each element of
Values[] will contain a 32-bit integer value
end macro_command

Precautions, Tips & Tricks when Using Macros

• The size of a macro in an xob file is limited by the memory of the OIT.
• The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes.
• A maximum of 256 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder project.
• A macro may cause the OIT to lock up. Possible causes are:
• A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication.
• The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro.
• PLC communication time may cause the macro to execute slower than expected.
• Random macro compiler errors can often be corrected by recompiling again, or canceling out of
the macro editor and then reopen and compile again.
• Some macros don’t work the way they should due to the declaration of some variables and how
they get interpreted. Some Boolean arrays work better when defined as an array of ‘short’s or
‘int’s. When getting data from an external register, the variable to receive it is best declared as a
‘short’ or an array of ‘short’s.

Compiler Errors & Error Codes

When there are compile errors, the error description can be referenced by the compiler error message number.
Error message format: Macro_name(: Error_message_number ) Error_Message.

• (1): "Syntax error", "identifier" - There are many possibilities for the cause of this compiler error.
Simply stated, the compiler found a problem with the syntax of the statement
• (2): Used without having been initialized. - Must define the size of an array during declaration. The
array size declaration must be a constant whole number, not a variable.
• (3): “Redefinition error: ” - The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique.
Macro_Command main( )
int g[10] , g //<- illegal – redefinition of ‘g’
For g[2] = 0 To 2

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Macros 289

g[3] = 4
Next g[2]
End Macro_Command
• (4): “Function name error:” ‘identifier’ - Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a
function
Macro_Command If( ) //<- illegal – used ‘If’ in the
name
• (5): “Statement missing” ; Statement missing “(“ or “)” - Some part of the Statement is missing,
typically it is a missing parentheses
Macro_Command main ) //<- illegal – missing ‘(‘
• (6): “Missing expression in ‘If’ statement”
• (7): “Missing “Then” in If statement”
• (8:) “Missing “EndIf” ” ;
• (9:) Unfinished “If’ statement before “End If” “ ;
• (10:) “Illegal Else statement” ;
The format of “If” statement is:
If [logic expression]Then
[ Else [If [logic expression] Then ] ]
EndIf
Any format other than this format will cause compile
error.
• (17:)" “For” statement error: missing “For” before “Next” “ ;
• (18:)"Should be integer of char variable" ;
• (19:)"Missing assign statement" ;
• (20:)"Missing keyword “To” “
• (21:)"Missing “Next” statement" ;
The format of “For” statement is:
For [variable] = [initial value] To [end value] [Step]
Next [variable]
Any format other than this format will cause compile error.
• (22:)" “While” statement error: missing “While” before “Wend” “ ;
• (23:)Missing “Wend” statement" ;
The format of “While” statement is:
While [logic expression]
Wend
Any format other than this format will cause compile error.
• (24:) “Illegal “Break” statement” ;
“Break” statement can only be used in “For”, “While”, or “Select
Case” statement
“Break” statement takes one line of Macro.
• (25:)"Illegal “Continue” statement" ;
“Continue” statement can only be used in “For” statement, or “While”
statement
“Continue” statement takes one line of Macro.
• (26:)"Expression error" ;
• (27:) Illegal operation object" ;
The mismatch of operation object in expression cause compile error.
For example :
Macro_Command main( )
int g[10]
For g[2] = 0 To 2
g[3] = 4 + XYZ <- illegal – XYZ is undefined
Next g[2]
End Macro_Command
• (28:)"Missing “Sub” “ ;
• (29:)"Missing “Macro_Command” “ ;
The format of function declaration is: Sub(Macro_Command) [data type]
function_name( … )

1010-1007W, Rev 06
290 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

End Sub(Macro_Command)
Any format other than this format will cause compile error.
• (30:)"Mismatch of the number of parameters “ ;
• (31:)"Mismatch of data type of parameter" ;
• (32:)"Parameter error";
The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to
a function to avoid compile error.
• (33:) “Undefined function” ;
• (34:)Illegal member of array
• (35:)Illegal definition of array";
• (36)Illegal index of array
• (37:) “Undefined symbol” ;
Any variable or function should be declared before use.
• (38:) “Un-supported PLC data address” ;
The parameter of GetData( … ) , SetData( … ) should be legal PLC
address.
• (39:) Should be integer, character or constant" ;
The format of array is:
Declaration: array_name[constant] (constant is the size of the array)
Usage: array_name[integer, character or constant] Any format other than
this format will cause compile error.
• (40:) “Illegal Macro statement before declaration statement ”
For example :
Macro_Command main( )
int g[10]
For g[2] = 0 To 2
g[3] = 4 + g[9]
int h , k <- illegal – definitions must occur
before any statements or expressions
Next g[2]
End Macro_Command

• (41:) “Floating point can not bitwise shift”

• (42:) “Missing function return value ” ;
• (43) “Function can not return a value”
• (44:) “Illegal Float data type in expression” ;
• (45:) “Error PLC address” ;
• (46:) “Stack can not exceed 4k bytes” ;
• (47:) “Only one main entrance in the Macro is allowed” ;
• (48) “Too many main entrance: ” ‘identifier’
The only one main entrance of Macro is:
Macro_Command function_name( )
End Macro_Command

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Miscellaneous Objects 291

Chapter 16 Miscellaneous Objects

Scheduler Object
The Scheduler Object takes advantage of the internal clock of the OIT (Note: the internal clock is not available on
the HMI5043N). When used, this object continuously reads from the internal OIT clock. When a predefined time
is reached, the OIT sets a bit or writes a constant value to a pre-defined OIT or PLC register. This feature can be
very useful to start/stop processes that are supposed to occur on a time-scheduled basis.
To create a Scheduler Object:

1. From the Objects menu, click Scheduler. Or click the Scheduler icon in the Object 1 toolbar. The New
Scheduler dialog box appears. Click the New button to add a new schedule:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
292 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

2. Power-ON start/end action: enable this feature to write to the defined bit or register whenever the HMI starts or
shuts down.

3. Action mode frame: Select type of action that is conducted when time trigger is due:

a. Bit ON: set the selected bit.

b. Bit OFF: turn off or clear the selected bit.

c. Word write: write a value to the selected register.

4. Action address: this is the target OIT or PLC address that is written to when the selected time has passed.
Note: if End Action on the Time Set tab is enabled, the OIT will automatically use the next consecutive address to
write the ‘End’ value.
a.PLC Name, etc.: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.
5. Word write value settings frame: If ‘Word write’ is selected in the Action mode frame, use this section to
either select a constant value to be written to the target register or a register that will be read and the value copied
into the target register.

a. Constant: check to write a constant value to the Action address:

b. Address: check to read the value from a OIT or PLC address, which is then used to write to target address:

c. PLC Name, etc.: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.
Please Note: Write end address [Address: 0+1] is the address used to read the ‘End’ value that is then sent to the
second consecutive register that is listed under Action address frame.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Miscellaneous Objects 293

The Time Set Tab

Time Set tab: determines the time trigger for the ‘Start’ and ‘End’ actions.

1. Constant or Address: used to determine if time trigger is based upon a predefined set time or is dynamically
determined from reading a series of control registers.
2.. If Constant is selected, these are the options:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
294 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

3. Setting on individual day: enable this option if you wish to configure a unique start time and/or end time for a
particular day of the week. Disable this option, if the start time and/or end time is to be activated for multiple days
of the week.

4. Start frame: Used to configure the time and days used for the ‘start’ time

a. Hours setting: the first box represents the hour of the day. Range is 0 to 23.

b. Minutes setting: the second box represents the minutes setting. Range is 0 to 59.

c. Seconds setting: the third box represents the seconds setting. Range is 0 to 59.

d. Days of the week: If ‘Setting on individual day’ is disabled, click on which days of the week you wish to
perform the action based upon the Start time configured. Please note that any combination is allowed,
(ex. Monday thru Friday; Monday, Wednesday, Friday; etc). If ‘Setting on individual day’ is enabled, then
click the particular day of the week desired.

5. End frame: Used to configure the time and days used for the ‘end’ time:

a. Enable termination action: If disabled, the ‘end’ time option is not used. If enabled, use the Hours, Minutes,
and Seconds setting boxes to input a time at which the OIT will reset the target bit or write the secondary
value configured on the General tab.

Please Note: this option is not available, if “Setting on individual day” is enabled.

b. Hours setting: the first box represents the hour of the day. Range is 0 to 23.

c. Minutes setting: the second box represents the minutes setting. Range is 0 to 59.

d. Seconds setting: the third box represents the seconds setting. Range is 0 to 59.

e. Days of the week: If ‘Setting on individual day’ is enabled, click on which days of the week you wish to
perform the action based upon the End time configured.

Please note that any combination is allowed, (ex. Start time is on Monday, End time is on Friday etc).

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Miscellaneous Objects 295

The Prohibit Tab

Prohibit tab: The prohibit tab is used to enable the ‘Prohibit’ feature or to enable an output sound if external
speakers are used:

1. Prohibit frame: used to enable the ‘Prohibit’ feature. This feature checks to see if an assigned bit is set or ON
before performing the scheduler function at the preset time. If the bit is ON, the scheduler function is not
performed.

a. Use prohibition function: check to enable the Prohibit feature.

b. PLC name, etc: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.
2. Sound frame: If external speakers are connected, you can enable this feature to output an audio sound wave
whenever the scheduler function is performed by the OIT.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
296 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Media Player

The Media Player object is used to view video files on the OIT (this feature is available on the ‘X’ models only).
Video files are most commonly used in applications for instructional or tutorial information or as a means of
displaying visual content for purposes of advertising, etc.:

The OIT reads from the video file immediately after the screen that contains the Media Player object is displayed.

Please Note: When using the Media Player object for the first time, you must download the project to the OIT via
the Ethernet port. By doing this, EZWare-5000 will install the necessary Media Player drivers during the
download.

Besides simply displaying video files, the Media Player object has several controls which allow the operator to
perform many operations on the file that is viewed including:

Seeking files

Zoom feature

Volume adjustment

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Miscellaneous Objects 297

To create a Media Player Object:

1. From the Objects menu, click Media Player. Or click the Media Player icon in the Object 2 toolbar. The New
Media Player dialog box appears:

2. Description: provides the OIT programmer with a description about this particular object for future reference.

3. Control Address frame: this feature is used to provide some control features to the media player.

a. Enable: check to enable the Control Address feature. This allows manual control of the Media Player
object using the addresses listed below. If disabled, the Media Player will automatically play the first video
in the designated folder when the screen is displayed.

b. PLC name, Device type, Address: see “General Properties” section at beginning of this chapter.

c. Command: 0 – register used to control the operation of the Media Player. In this example, LW0 is the
command register. The following values will result in the following:

i. Value =0: No operation. Default value.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
298 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

ii. Value =1: Play the index file. In this mode, use Parameter 1 to select the file index. Parameter 2 is not used.
Files are sorted based upon the filename in alphabetical order. Ex. If File Index =0, then the first video file is played.

iii. Value =2: Play Previous file. In this mode, Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 are not used, so set to 0. If the File
Index is set to 0, then the Media Player replays the same video from the start.

iv. Value =3: Play Next file. In this mode, Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 are not used, so set to 0. If the last video
file is played, the Media Player will play the first (Index 0) file.

v. Value =4: Pauses the video. Enter 4 again to restart the video.

vi. Value =5: Stops the video that is currently playing and closes the file.

vii. Value =6: Starts playing the video file at a designated target location in the file. In this mode, use Parameter
1 to select the target location (units in seconds). Note: If the value in Parameter 1 is larger than the end time of the
video file, than the video will play the final second of the file.

viii.Value =7: Fast Forward file. In this mode, use Parameter 1 to select the number of seconds to advance from
the current location.

ix. Value =8: Rewind file. In this mode, use Parameter 1 to select the number of seconds to rewind from the
current location.

x. Value =9: Adjust volume. Use Parameter 1 to determine volume level. Range is 0 – 128. Note: Default volume
level is 128.

xi. Value =10: Set Video Display Size. Use Parameter 1 to determine the relative display size. Magnification has
sixteen levels:

1. Level 1 is 25% of normal

2. Level 2 is 50% of normal

3. Level 3 is 75% of normal

4. Level 4 is 100% of normal

5. Level 5 is 125% of normal

6. Level 6 is 150% of normal

7. Level 7 is 175% of normal

8. Level 8 is 200% of normal

9. Level 9 is 225% of normal

10. Level 10 is 250% of normal

11 .Level 11 is 275% of normal

12. Level 12 is 300% of normal

13. Level 13 is 325% of normal

14. Level 14 is 350% of normal

15. Level 15 is 375% of normal

16. Level 16 is 400% of normal

Note Default size is 4 (100%).

d. Parameter 1: 0+1 – depending upon the value in the Command register, this register may be used to provide
additional parameters. In this example, LW1 is the parameter 1 register.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Miscellaneous Objects 299

e. Parameter 2: 0+2 – depending upon the value in the Command register, this register may be used to provide
additional parameters. In this example, LW2 is the parameter 2 register.

f. Status: 0+3 – this Read Only register is used to provide status on the video that is playing. In this example,
LW3 is the status register.

i.Bit 0 – File Open (0=closed, 1=open)

ii.Bit 1 – File Playing (0=closed, 1=playing)

iii.Bit 8 – Command Error (0=correct, 1= command/parameter error) For example, this bit is set if the media
player object is unable to locate a playable file in the designated folder.

iv.Bit 9 – File Error (0=file format and load correct, 1=file format or loading error)

g. File index: 0+4 – this Read Only register provides the file index on the video that is playing. In this example,
LW4 is the file index register. File index is used to indicate the order of the video files being displayed.

h. Start time: 0+5 – this Read Only register is used to provide the start time (always 0) on the video that is
currently playing. Units are in seconds. In this example, LW5 is the start time register.

i. End time: 0+6 – this Read Only register is used to provide the total time length of the video that is currently
playing. Units are in seconds. In this example, LW6 is the end time register.

4. Update video playing time: enable this feature to display the current running (elapsed) time of the video that is
playing.

a. Update period: select how often the OIT updates the running time. Range is 1-60 seconds.

b. Playing time: 0+7 – this indicates which register is used to display the video playing time based upon an
offset from the Command register. The register used is set to the Command address + 7. In this example,
LW7 is the update video play time.

5 .Ex. Device frame: Determines the location of the video files that are played.

a. SD: the video files are located on a Secure Digital (SD) card

b. USB1: located on the USB1 port. Note: USB1 is not a specific location on the OIT. Rather, this is the first
USB port on the OIT that is used.

c. USB2: located on the USB2 port.

d. Folder name: This is the folder on the SD or USB Flash Drive. Note: You must create a folder to store the
video files- do not use the root directory of the target solid state drive. The folder name must contain
characters only (character symbols such as *, ?, <, >, are not allowed).

6. Attribute frame: determines additional attributes of the Media Player object.

a. Auto. repeat: enable if you want the Media Player object to automatically play the next video file. Note:
after the last video file, the Media Player will start over with the first video file.

b. Background: color for the background of the object.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
300 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Preview tab: used to preview a video file:

1. Rewind button: click to rewind the video by 1 minute.

2. Play button: click to play the video. Note: if the video does not start playing, then the OIT does not
support that format.

3. Stop button: click to stop playing the video.

4. Fast Forward button: click to fast-forward the video by 1 minute.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Miscellaneous Objects 301

5. Load button: click to select which video to play.

6. Information screen: this provides detailed information about the particular video file being previewed.

a. File: name of video file

b. Format: type of video file, duration and bit rate.

Important Note: File formats supported are AVI, WMV, MOV, MPEG4, FLV, and XVID.

c. Stream #0: Audio file information and type

d. Steam #1: Video file information and type

Regarding File Size:

There is no limitation to the size of the video file except for the size of the storage device (SD or USB flash drive).

On some video files, you may notice that the file will not play or may have a lag time due to the limitations of the
OIT’s processor speed and memory. Therefore, we recommend a file resolution no greater than 640x480 pixels and
a bit rate that is less than 700 KB per second.

To play a video

When displaying an OIT screen that has a Media Player object on it, perform the following steps to begin playing
the video:

· Set the value in the Parameter 1 register to select the correct video. Parameter 1 is used to select the File Index
number. The video files are organized and assigned a file index number according to alphabetical order. The first
file is assigned File Index 0, second file is File Index 1, etc.

· Set the value in the Command Register to 1. The OIT reads the video files and starts playing the specified file.

· The OIT will reset the Command Register to 0 and play the video until the end of the file. Note: during ‘play’ do
not change the values in the Command register or Parameter 1/Parameter 2 register as this may cause erratic
results.

To stop a video

To stop playing a video that is currently running on a Media Player object:

· Set the value in the Command Register to 5. The OIT stops reading the video file and displaying the movie. The
OIT closes the video file.

· After closing the video file, the OIT will reset the Command Register to 0. Note: during this sequence do not
change the values in the Command register or Parameter 1/Parameter 2 register as this may cause erratic results.

1010-1007W, Rev 06
302 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Index 303

Index
A Blinking feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Adjust volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Boolean expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Alarm Bar Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 C
Alarm Display Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Cable Routing and Noise Immunity . . . . . . . . 10
Alarm/Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarms, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
align bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 change state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
align horizontal cente . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Circle tool, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
align left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Closing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
align right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Closing windows or screens . . . . . . . . . . . 117
align top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 COM ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
align vertical center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Common windows, above/below the base screen feature
130
Alignment tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Common windows, changing. . . . . . . . . . . 132
Always ON bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Common windows, using. . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Animation Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Animation Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
CompactFlash settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Arc tool, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
CompactFlash, transferring projects . . . . . . . . 23
ASCII Data Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Compiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ASCII Display Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ASCII Input Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
compress feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ASCII Input Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Configuration Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Attributes, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Connecting HMI to Computer . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic toggling feature (periodical toggle). . 196
Control Address frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
B
Control panel grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
background pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Control panel, requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
backlight settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Control word address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Backup Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Control Word Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Copy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Bar Graphs, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,258
Create a Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Base windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
create a new project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Bit Lamp Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
create an Animation Object. . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Bit Lamp Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Creating a new window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Bitmap Libraries, deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
CSV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Bitmap Libraries, using. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Bitmap Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
D
Data Block Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,232
Bitmaps, exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

1010-1007W, Rev 06
304 Silver Series Plus Installation & Operation Manual

Data Block Display Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Fast Selection windows, changing . . . . . . . . 136
Data Format tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Fast Selection windows, using . . . . . . . . . . 133
data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Data Memory of OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Fix Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Data Sampling Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Flipping tools, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Data storage start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 font size, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
data transfer object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 free line tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Data Transfer Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Full screen windows, displaying . . . . . . . . . 124
date settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
decrement key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Function Key Object, creating keypads . . . . . 241
Deleting a part or object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Function Key Object, displaying windows . . . . 124
DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 G
Direct Window Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Display Area tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 GIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Display Meter Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Graphics Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Grid frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Drawing tools, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Grid function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
E grid size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
EasyBuilder Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Group Libraries, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Editing Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Group Libraries, deleting a group member . . . . 160
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Grouping objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Ellipse/Circle tool, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 H
End frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Event Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 History Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Event Display Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 I
Event Display Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 269 increment key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Event Log Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Indirect Window Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Events, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Input illegal frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
exit EasyBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Installing the OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Exiting EasyBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 internal data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
extend memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Internal OIT Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
extract a compressed project file. . . . . . . . . . 82
J
EZware-500 configuration software, installation . 35
Jog feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
EZware-500 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
JPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
F
K
factory configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
keypad entry screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fast Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Keypad, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fast Selection key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Index 305

Keypad, displaying and using . . . . . . . . . . 242 Multiple copies of object on screen, making . . . 87
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 MultiState Switch Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

L N
Labeling an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 NEMA rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 NEMA Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Layering tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 network settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Noise Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Libraries, Graphics using . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Notification frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,239
Line tools, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Nudge tools, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
linked line tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Numeric Data Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 209
local setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Numeric Display Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Numeric Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

M Numeric Input Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Macro frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Numeric Input register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 numeric register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Macros, Array initialization . . . . . . . . . . . 281 O

Macros, Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Macros, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,291 Object Attributes, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Macros, using with recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 object ID tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Macros, Variable Declarations . . . . . . . . . . 280 Object ID tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Macros, Variable Initialization . . . . . . . . . . 280 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Mapping tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Objects, creating & editing . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Mapping table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 off-line simulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Offset to start address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 OIT (Operator Interface Terminal) . . . . . . . . . 2
meter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 on-line simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Meter Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Opening projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Opening windows or screens . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Miscellaneous Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Monitoring Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
monopoly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Monopoly feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Option List icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Moving a part or object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Option List Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Moving Shape Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 218,219 P
Moving Shape Object, scaling feature . . . . . . 222 Panel Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Moving Shape Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Pass-through mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Multi-copy command, using . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Pauses the video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

1010-1007W, Rev 06
306 Silver Series Plus Installation & Operation Manual

picture library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 RnI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rotation tools, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
pie tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 S
Play Next file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Play Previous file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Same Size tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Play the index file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Sample Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PLC block pack feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
PLC Coil Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Saving Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
PLC Control Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Scale lines tool, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
PLC, displaying windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Security tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Polygon tool, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 select all objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Popup windows, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . 124 select next object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Port wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Selecting graphic objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Power supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Power-ON start/end action . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Set Bit Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Power-ON start/end action:. . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Set Bit Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Printer server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Set Video Display Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Programming the OIT, wiring . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Set Word Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Prohibit frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Set Word Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Prohibit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Shape libraries, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Prohibit Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Shape Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,6 Shape tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Project, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
ProjectManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,61 Simulation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Projects, Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Simulation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Projects, opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 simulation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Pulsing a bit, using Set Bit Object . . . . . . . . 196 Simulation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
R Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Slider Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Recipe Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Snap Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Recipe/Extended Memory Editor . . . . . . . . . 71 Sound frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Rectangle tool, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 sound library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Redo command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Start frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Reserved local bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Starting EZware500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Startup Window, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Resizing a part or object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 States, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Stops the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Rn Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 system information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Index 307

system message window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Window, definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Window, deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Window, fundamental settings . . . . . . . . . . 119
system settings, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Window, selecting a new background color . . . 122

T Windows, how to display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Tag Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Word Lamp Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

tag databases, label library . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Word write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Tag databases, label library. . . . . . . . . . . . 166 X

Tag Databases, tag library . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 XY Plot Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tag databases, using the tag library . . . . . . . 166 Z
tag library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 zoom in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tag Library, Import and export. . . . . . . . . . 165
Text Box Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Time descending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Time Set Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Toggle Switch Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Toggle Switch Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Trend Display Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Trend Display Object, using . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Trend Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

U
Underlay Windows
assigning121
assigning to a base window122
how to display122
rules that apply to122
Undo command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
USB jump drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
USB, transferring projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

W
WAV files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Window Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Window frames, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Window Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Window No. Treebar, using to navigate . . . . . . 83

1010-1007W, Rev 06
308 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
Index 309

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06
310 Silver Series Installation & Operation Manual

Please Use This Page For Your Notes:

1010-1007W, Rev 06